Canon Webcam 3814B010 User Manual

E
INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a Canon product.  
The EOS 7D is a high-performance, digital SLR camera featuring a  
fine-detail CMOS sensor with about 18.0 effective megapixels, Dual  
“DIGIC 4”, 100% viewfinder coverage, high-precision and high-speed  
19-point AF (all cross-type), approx. 8 fps continuous shooting, Live  
View shooting, and Full HD (Full High-Definition) movie shooting.  
The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation at anytime,  
provides many features for demanding shoots, and expands shooting  
possibilities with system accessories.  
Take a Few Test Shots to Familiarize Yourself with the  
Camera  
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have  
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how  
they come out. You can then better understand the camera.  
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first ead the Safety Warnings  
(p.261,262) and Handling Precautions 2,13.  
Testing the Camera Before g and Liability  
After shooting, playback ad checether the image has been  
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the  
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon  
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.  
Copyrights  
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded  
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private  
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,  
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.  
CF Card  
In this manual, “card” refers to the CF card. The CF card (for  
recording images) is not included. Please purchase it separately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Item Check List  
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included  
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.  
Battery Pack  
LP-E6  
(with protective cover)  
Battery Charger  
LC-E6/LC-E6E*  
Camera  
(with eyecup and  
body cap)  
Wide Strap  
EW-EOS7D  
Interfacble  
IFC-2
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk  
(Software)  
Software  
Instruction Manual  
(1) Instruction Manual (this booklet)  
(2) Pocket Guide  
Quick start guide to shooting.  
(3) CD-ROM Guide  
Guide to the provided software (EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk) and Software Instruction Manuals.  
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a  
power cord.)  
  If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lens is included.  
  Depending on the Lens Kit type, the lens instruction manual might also be  
included.  
  Be careful not to lose any of the above items.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Conventions Used in this Manual  
Icons in this Manual  
<6>  
<5>  
<9>  
<0>  
: Indicates the Main Dial.  
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.  
: Indicates the Multi-controller.  
: Indicates the setting button.  
0, 9, 7, 8: Indicates that the respective function remains  
active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec.  
respectively after you let go of the button.  
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,  
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the  
LCD monitor.  
3: Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the  
<M> button and changing the settig.  
M
: When shown on the upper righthe age, it indicates that the  
function is available only when e Mode Dial is set to d, s,  
f, a, or F.  
* Function which canot be uthe fully-automatic modes (1/C).  
(p.**) : Reference page numbes for more information.  
: Tip or advice for better shooting.  
: Problem-solving advice.  
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.  
: Supplemental information.  
Basic Assumptions  
 All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch  
is already set to <1> (p.27).  
 <5> operations explained in this manual assume that the Quick  
Control Dial switch is already set to <J>.  
 It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are  
set to the default.  
 For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached  
with an EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Chapters  
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s  
basic operations and shooting procedures.  
Introduction  
2
23  
49  
Camera basics.  
Getting Started  
1
Basic Shooting  
2
Fully automatic shooting.  
57  
83  
Image Settings  
3
4
Setting the AF and Drive Mods  
Advanced Operati
95  
5
Advanced shoting fe
Live View shooting  
131  
6
Shoot while viewing the LCD monitor.  
149  
161  
183  
189  
203  
227  
Shooting Movies  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Image Playback  
Sensor Cleaning  
Printing Images  
Customizing the Camera  
Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Contents  
Introduction  
Item Check List.................................................................................................. 3  
Conventions Used in this Manual...................................................................... 4  
Chapters............................................................................................................ 5  
Index to Features ............................................................................................ 10  
Handling Precautions ...................................................................................... 12  
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................ 14  
Nomenclature.................................................................................................. 16  
Getting Started  
23  
1
Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 24  
Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 26  
Turning on the Power ...................................................................................... 27  
Installing and Removing the CF Card........................................................... 29  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens ................................................................ 31  
About the Lens Image Stabilizer......................................................... 33  
Basic Operation................................................................................... 34  
Q Using the Quick Control Scr......................................................... 38  
3Menu Operations.......................................................................... 40  
Before You Start.......................................................................................... 42  
Setting the Interface Language .................................................................... 42  
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................ 42  
Formatting the Card ..................................................................................... 43  
Set the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ....................................................... 44  
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings.............................................. 45  
Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level......................................................... 47  
Basic Shooting  
49  
2
3
1 Fully Automatic Shooting .......................................................................... 50  
1 Full Auto Techniques ................................................................................ 52  
C Creative Auto Shooting ............................................................................. 53  
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................... 56  
Image Settings  
57  
Setting the Image-recording Quality................................................................ 58  
i: Setting the ISO Speed............................................................................. 62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Contents  
A Selecting a Picture Style..........................................................................64  
A Customizing a Picture Style.....................................................................66  
A Registering a Picture Style.......................................................................68  
B: Setting the White Balance.......................................................................70  
O Custom White Balance...........................................................................71  
P Setting the Color Temperature ...............................................................72  
uWhite Balance Correction ...........................................................................73  
Auto Lighting Optimizer....................................................................................75  
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction ...........................................................76  
Creating and Selecting a Folder.......................................................................78  
File Numbering Methods..................................................................................80  
Setting the Color Space ...................................................................................82  
Setting the AF and Drive Modes  
83  
4
5
f: Selecting the AF Mode.............................................................................84  
SSelecting the AF Area............................................................................87  
AF Area Selection Modes ....................................................................89  
When Autofocus Fails ...........................................................................92  
MF: Manual Focusing .....................................................................92  
i Selecting the Dre Mode..................................................................93  
j Using the Self-timr .................................................................................94  
Advanced Operations  
95  
d: Program AE................................................................................................96  
s: Shutter-Priority AE ...................................................................................98  
f: Aperture-Priority AE...............................................................................100  
Depth of Field Preview................................................................................101  
a: Manual Exposure.....................................................................................102  
q Selecting the Metering Mode ...................................................................103  
Setting Exposure Compensation....................................................................104  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ............................................................105  
AAE Lock ....................................................................................................106  
F: Bulb Exposures ........................................................................................107  
Mirror Lockup .................................................................................................109  
R Remote Control Shooting............................................................................110  
DUsing the Built-in Flash ..............................................................................111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Contents  
Setting the Flash ........................................................................................... 115  
Using Wireless Flash..................................................................................... 119  
External Speedlites ....................................................................................... 129  
Live View Shooting  
131  
6
A Live View Shooting.................................................................................. 132  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 135  
z Menu Function Settings........................................................................... 136  
Using AF to Focus......................................................................................... 138  
Focusing Manually......................................................................................... 145  
Shooting Movies  
149  
7
k Shooting Movies...................................................................................... 150  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 155  
x Menu Function Settings...................................................................... 156  
Image Playback  
161  
8
xImage Playback.......................................................................... 162  
B Shooting Informaon Dis........................................................ 163  
HI Searching for Imaes Quickly ............................................................. 165  
u/y Magnified View................................................................................. 167  
b Rotating the Image................................................................................... 168  
k Enjoying Movies ...................................................................................... 169  
k Playing Movies ........................................................................................ 171  
X Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................... 173  
Slide Show (Auto Playback) .......................................................................... 174  
Viewing the Images on TV............................................................................. 176  
K Protecting Images.................................................................................... 178  
LErasing Images......................................................................................... 179  
Changing Image Playback Settings............................................................... 181  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 181  
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images................................................................ 182  
Sensor Cleaning  
183  
9
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning ................................................................... 184  
Appending Dust Delete Data......................................................................... 185  
Manual Sensor Cleaning ............................................................................... 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Printing Images  
189  
10  
11  
Preparing to Print ...........................................................................................190  
wPrinting......................................................................................................192  
Trimming the Image ....................................................................................197  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)...........................................................199  
W Direct Printing with DPOF ........................................................................202  
Customizing the Camera  
203  
Setting Custom Functions..............................................................................204  
Custom Functions ..........................................................................................205  
Custom Function Settings..............................................................................206  
C.Fn I : Exposure ......................................................................................206  
C.Fn II : Image ...........................................................................................208  
C.Fn III : Autofocus/Drive .........................................................................209  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others....................................................................215  
Registering My Menu ..........................................................................222  
w Register Camera User Ss.............................................................223  
Setting Copyright Informatio...............................................................225  
Reference  
227  
12  
B Button Functions....................................................................................228  
Checking the Battery Information...................................................................230  
Using a Household Power Outlet...................................................................234  
Replacing the Date/Time Battery ...................................................................235  
Function Availability Table .............................................................................236  
Menu Settings ................................................................................................238  
Troubleshooting Guide...................................................................................243  
Error Codes....................................................................................................249  
System Map ...................................................................................................250  
Specifications.................................................................................................252  
Safety Warnings.............................................................................................261  
Index ..............................................................................................................270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Index to Features  
 Color space  
Î p.82  
Power  
 Image improvement features  
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.75  
• Lens peripheral illumination  
 Battery  
• Charging  
• Battery check  
Î p.24  
Î p.28  
correction  
Î p.76  
Battery information check Î p.230  
• Noise reduction  
for long exposures  
• Noise reduction  
for high ISO speeds  
• Highlight tone priority  
 Power outlet  
 Auto power off  
Î p.234  
Î p.44  
Î p.208  
Î p.208  
Î p.209  
Lens  
 Attaching/Detaching  
 Zoom  
Î p.31  
Î p.32  
Î p.33  
AF  
 AF mode  
Î p.84  
Î p.87  
 Image Stabilizer  
 AF point selection  
Basic Settings  
 AF area selection mode Î p.89  
(Menu Functions)  
• Limtd  
Î p.212  
Î p.92  
nual ocusing  
 Language  
 Date/Time  
Î p.42  
Î p.42  
Metering  
 LCD brightness  
 Metering mode  
Î p.103  
adjustment  
Î p.181  
Î p.238  
 Beeper  
Drive  
 Release shutter  
 Drive modes  
Î p.93  
Î p.60  
without card  
Î p.29  
 Maximum burst  
Recording Images  
Shooting  
 Format  
Î p.43  
Î p.78  
Î p.80  
 Electronic level  
 Creative Auto  
 Program AE  
Î p.48  
Î p.53  
Î p.96  
Î p.98  
Î p.100  
Î p.102  
Î p.107  
Î p.109  
Î p.38  
 Create/select a folder  
 File No.  
Image Quality  
 Shutter-priority AE  
 Aperture-priority AE  
 Manual exposure  
 Bulb  
 Image-recording quality Î p.58  
 One-touch RAW+JPEG Î p.61  
 ISO speed  
Î p.62  
Î p.64  
Î p.70  
 Picture Style  
 White balance  
 Mirror lockup  
 Quick Control screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Index to Features  
 Self-timer  
Î p.94  
Image playback  
 Remote control  
Î p.110  
 Image review time  
Î p.56  
 Single image display  
Î p.162  
Exposure adjustment  
• Shooting information  
display  
 Exposure compensation Î p.104  
Î p.163  
Î p.171  
 AEB  
Î p.105  
Î p.106  
 Movie playback  
 AE lock  
 Movie first/last scene  
editing  
Î p.173  
Î p.165  
Flash  
 Index display  
 Built-in flash  
Î p.111  
 Image browsing  
(Jump display)  
Î p.166  
Î p.167  
Î p.174  
• Flash exposure  
compensation  
• FE lock  
Î p.113  
Î p.114  
Î p.129  
 Magnified view  
 Auto playback  
 External flash  
 Flash control  
• Wireless flash  
 Viewing the images  
on V  
Î p.115  
Î p.119  
Î p.176  
Î p.178  
Î p.179  
Proect  
 Erase  
Live View shooting  
 Live View shooting  
 AF  
Î p
Î p.138  
Î p.145  
Î p.136  
Î p.136  
Î p.137  
Customization  
 Custom Function (C.Fn) Î p.204  
 Manual focusing  
 Exposure simulation  
 Grid display  
 Custom Controls  
 My Menu  
Î p.215  
Î p.222  
 Camera user setting  
registration  
 Silent shooting  
Î p.223  
Movie shooting  
Sensor cleaning/  
Dust reduction  
 Movie shooting  
 Movie menu  
 Stills  
Î p.149  
Î p.156  
Î p.154  
 Sensor cleaning  
Î p.183  
Î p.185  
 Add Dust Delete Data  
Viewfinder  
 Dioptric adjustment  
 Grid display  
Î p.34  
Î p.47  
Î p.221  
 Electronic level  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Handling Precautions  
Camera Care  
  This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical  
shock.  
  The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you  
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult your nearest  
Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the  
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.  
  Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such  
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near  
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong  
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.  
  Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.  
High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.  
  The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to  
disassemble the camera yourself.  
  Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and  
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contan organic solvents to clean  
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, takhe camera to the nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
  Do not touch the camera’s electrconcts with your fingers. This is to  
prevent the contacts from corrodrroded contacts can cause camera  
misoperation.  
  If the camera is suddenly rougt in from the cold into a warm room,  
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent  
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to  
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.  
  If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid  
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and  
battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has evaporated  
before using the camera.  
  If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery  
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the  
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to  
check that the camera is still working.  
  Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a  
darkroom or chemical lab.  
  If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions  
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is  
an important shoot coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon  
dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Handling Precautions  
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor  
  Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision  
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead  
pixels among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels. Dead pixels displaying  
only black or red, etc., are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images  
recorded.  
  If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur  
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only  
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it  
might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
Cards  
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:  
  Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,  
physical shock, or vibration.  
  Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field  
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Asavoid places prone to having  
static electricity.  
  Do not leave the card in direct unligr near a heat source.  
  Store the card in a case.  
  Do not store the card in hot, dr humid locations.  
Lens  
After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens  
caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid  
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.  
Contacts  
Cautions During Prolonged Use  
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a  
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a  
malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin  
burns.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
Quick Start Guide  
Insert the battery. (p.26)  
To charge the battery, see page 24.  
1
For EF-S lens  
For EF lens  
Attach the lens. (p.31)  
2
When attaching an EF-S lens, align it  
with the white index on the camera.  
For other lenses, align it with the red  
index.  
Set the lenfocus mode switch  
to <A(p.31)  
3
4
5
Open the slot cover and  
insert a card. (p.29)  
Face the label side toward you  
and insert the end with the  
small holes into the camera.  
Set the power switch to <1>.  
(p.27)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Quick Start Guide  
Set the Mode Dial to <1> (Full  
Auto). (p.50)  
All the necessary camera settings will  
be set automatically.  
6
7
Focus the subject. (p.35)  
Look through the viewfinder and aim  
the viewfinder center over the subject.  
Press the shutter button halfway, and  
the camera will focus the subject.  
If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-  
up automatically.  
akthe picture. (p.35)  
ess the shutter button completely to  
take the picture.  
8
9
Review the picture. (p.56)  
The captured image will be displayed  
for about 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.  
To display the image again, press the  
<x> button (p.162).  
  To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.162).  
  To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.179).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Nomenclature  
For detailed information, reference page numbers are provided in parentheses (p.**).  
<o> AF mode  
selection/Drive mode  
selection button (p.84/93)  
<n> Metering mode  
selection/White balance  
selection button (p.103/70)  
<m> ISO speed setting/  
Flash exposure compensation  
button (p.62/113)  
LCD panel (p.18)  
EF lens mount index (p.31)  
<U> LCD panel  
illumination button (p.37)  
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam  
(p.111/91)  
EF-S lens mount index (p.31)  
Flash-sync contacts  
<6> Main Dial  
(p.36)  
<B>  
Multi-function  
button (p.88,114)  
Hot shoe (p.129)  
Mode Dial (p.20)  
Shutter button  
(p.35)  
Strap mount  
(p.23)  
Red-eye  
reduction/  
Self-timer lamp  
(p.112/94)  
Microphone  
(p.157)  
Remote control  
sensor (p.110)  
<D> Flash  
button (p.111)  
Grip  
(Battery  
compartment)  
Terminal cover  
Lens release  
button (p.32)  
DC coupler cord  
hole (p.234)  
Depth-of-field  
preview button  
(p.101)  
Mirror (p.109,187)  
Lens lock pin  
Lens mount  
Contacts (p.13)  
External microphone IN terminal (p.151)  
PC terminal (p.130)  
Audio/video OUT/Digital terminal (p.176,190)  
Remote control terminal (p.108) (N3 type)  
HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.177)  
Body cap (p.31)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Nomenclature  
<A/l> Live View shooting/  
<V> Focal plane mark  
Movie shooting switch (p.131/149)/  
<0> Start/Stop button (p.132,150)  
<p> AF start button  
(p.35,85,133,151)  
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.34)  
<A/I>  
Eyecup (p.108)  
Viewfinder eyepiece  
Speaker (p.171)  
AE lock button/  
Index/Reduce button  
(p.106/165/167,197)  
<S/u>  
<P/l>  
AF point selection/  
Magnify button  
(p.87/167,197)  
One-touch RAW+JPEG/  
Direct print button  
(p.61/195)  
<9>  
Multi-controller  
(p.36)  
Power switch (p.27)  
<Q> Quick Control  
button (p.38)  
Strap mount  
(p.23)  
<M> Menu  
button (p.40)  
<A> Picture  
Style selection  
button (p.64)  
Card slot  
cover (p.29)  
<B> Info  
button (p.48,134,  
152,162,228)  
Battery  
compartment  
cover release  
lever (p.26)  
<x> Playback  
button (p.162)  
<L> Erase  
button (p.179)  
Battery compartment  
cover (p.26)  
Extension system  
terminal  
Access lamp (p.30)  
<5> Quick Control Dial  
(p.37)  
LCD monitor (p.40, 181)  
Tripod socket  
Quick Control Dial switch (p.37)  
Light sensor (p.181)  
<0> Setting button (p.40)  
Card slot (p.29)  
Card ejection button (p.30)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Nomenclature  
LCD Panel  
Shutter speed  
Card full warning (FuLL CF)  
Card error warning (Err CF)  
No card warning (no CF)  
Error code (Err)  
Busy (buSY)  
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)  
Image-recording quality (p.60)  
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)  
37  
38  
47  
48  
67  
68  
1
Large/Fine  
Large/Normal  
Medium/Fine  
Medium/Normal  
Small/Fine  
Aperture  
White balance correction (p.73)  
Shots remaining  
Small/Normal  
RAW  
Shots remaining  
during WB bracketing  
a1 Medium RAW  
61 Small RAW  
Self-timer countdown  
Bulb exposure time  
White balance (p.70)  
<h> AEB (p.105)  
QAuto  
W
Daylight  
AF mode (p.84)  
E Shade  
X
One-Shot AF  
R
Y
U
Cloudy  
9
AI Focus AF  
Tungsten light  
White  
fluorescent light  
Z
AI Servo AF  
I
Flash  
O
P
Custom  
Drive mode (p.93)  
Color  
temperature  
u
Single shooting  
oHigh-speed continuous  
shooting  
Exposure level indicator  
Exposure compensation  
amount (p.104)  
i
Low-speed continuous  
shooting  
Q
10 sec. Self-timer/  
Remote control  
AEB range (p.105)  
Flash exposure compensation  
amount (p.113)  
k 2 sec. Self-timer/  
Remote control  
Card writing status  
ISO speed (p.62)  
Battery check (p.28)  
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.209)  
z xcm  
b
n
Metering mode (p.103)  
q Evaluative metering  
w Partial metering  
Flash exposure compensation (p.113)  
<0> Monochrome shooting (p.65)  
<g> ISO speed (p.62)  
r Spot metering  
e Center-weighted average metering  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Nomenclature  
Viewfinder Information  
Spot metering circle (p.103)  
Focusing screen  
Area AF frame/  
Zone AF frame (p.87)  
<S> AF points  
<O> Spot AF points (p.87)  
Grid (p.47)  
<g> ISO speed  
<u> White  
balance  
correction  
<o> Focus confirmation  
light  
<
> Battery check  
<A> AE lock/  
AEB in-progress  
Max. burst  
<0> Monochrome  
shooting  
<D> Flash-ready  
Improper FE lock  
warning  
ISO speed  
<A> Highlight tone priority  
Exposure level indicator  
Exposure compensation amount  
Flash exposure compensation amount  
AEB range  
<d> FE lock/  
FEB in-progress  
<e> High-speed sync  
(FP flash)  
<y> Flash exposure  
compensation  
Red-eye reduction lamp-on indicator  
Shutter speed  
FE lock (FEL)  
Busy (buSY)  
Built-in flash recycling (D buSY)  
Card full warning (FuLL CF)  
Card error warning (Err CF)  
No card warning (no CF)  
Aperture  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Nomenclature  
Mode Dial  
Camera User Settings  
Most camera settings can be registered under w,  
x, or y (p.223).  
F
: Bulb (p.107)  
a : Manual exposure (p.102)  
f: Aperture-priority AE (p.100)  
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.98)  
d
: Program A(p.96)  
Futomatic Modes  
All you do is press the shutter button.  
Fully-automatic shooting suitable for the  
subject.  
1: Full Auto (p.50)  
C: Creative Auto (p.53)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Nomenclature  
Lens  
Lens with a distance scale  
Focus mode switch (p.31)  
Hood mount  
(p.258)  
Zoom position index (p.32)  
Distance scale  
Filter thread  
(front of lens) (p.258)  
Zoom ring (p.32)  
Focusing ring (p.92,145)  
Image Stabilizer switch
Contacts (p.13)  
Lens mount index (p.31)  
Lens without a distance scale  
Focusing ring (p.92,145)  
Hood mount  
(p.258)  
Focus mode switch (p.31)  
Zoom position index (p.32)  
Filter thread  
(front of lens) (p.258)  
Zoom ring (p.32)  
Image Stabilizer switch (p.33)  
Lens mount index (p.31)  
Contacts (p.13)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
Nomenclature  
Battery Charger LC-E6  
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.24).  
Power plug  
Battery pack slot  
Charge lamp  
This power unit is intended to be correctly orientated in a vertical or  
floor mount position.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK RE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THSE INSCTIONS.  
For connection to a supply nt in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter  
of the proper configuration for the power outlet.  
Battery Charger LC-E6E  
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6 (p.24).  
Power cord  
Charge lamp  
Battery pack slot  
Power cord socket  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Getting Started  
This chapter explains preparatorstepbefore you start  
shooting and basic camera opeons.  
Attg the Strap  
Pass the end of the strap through  
the camera’s strap mount eyelet  
from the bottom. Then pass it  
through the strap’s buckle as shown  
in the illustration. Pull the strap to  
take up any slack and make sure  
the strap will not loosen from the  
buckle.  
  The eyepiece cover is also  
attached to the strap (p.108).  
Eyepiece cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Charging the Battery  
Remove the protective cover.  
1
Attach the battery.  
  As shown in the illustration, attach the  
battery securely.  
2
  To detach the battery, follow the  
above procedure in reverse.  
Recharge the battery.  
For LC-E6  
  As shown bthe arrow, flip out the  
battery charer’s prongs and insert  
the pgs inta power outlet.  
LC-E6  
3
F-E6E  
LC-E6E  
  nect the power cord to the  
charger and insert the plug into the  
power outlet.  
X Recharging starts automatically and  
the charge lamp blinks in orange.  
Charge Lamp  
Charge Level  
Color  
Indicator  
0 - 50%  
50 - 75%  
75% or higher  
Fully charged  
Blinks once per second  
Blinks twice per second  
Blinks three times per second  
Lights on  
Orange  
Green  
 
It takes about 2.5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted  
battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge the battery  
depends on the ambient temperature and battery’s charge level.  
  For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /  
41°F - 50°F) will take a longer time (up to 4 hours).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
Charging the Battery  
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger  
 
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.  
Even during non-use or storage, a charged battery will gradually  
discharge and lose its power.  
  After recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the power  
cord or prongs from the power outlet.  
  You can attach the cover in a different  
orientation to indicate whether the battery  
has been recharged or not.  
If the battery has been recharged, attach the  
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <  
> is  
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is  
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.  
  When not using the camera, rve te battery.  
If the battery is left in the cafor a prolonged period, a small amount  
of power current is reeasedting in excess discharge and shorter  
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing  
the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery’s performance.  
  The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.  
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz  
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for  
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage  
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.  
  If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully  
charged, the battery has worn out.  
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.230) and purchase a  
new battery.  
  If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.230) is 94% or higher, the battery  
will not be recharged.  
  After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the charger  
power plug (prongs) for at least 3 sec.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Installing and Removing the Battery  
Installing the Battery  
Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6 into the camera. The  
camera’s viewfinder will become bright when a battery is installed,  
and darken when the battery is removed.  
Open the battery compartment  
cover.  
  Slide the lever as shown by the arrow  
1
and open the cover.  
Insert the battery.  
2
  Insert the end with the battery  
contacts.  
  Insert he btery until it locks in  
place
Clhe cover.  
3
  Press the cover to close it.  
Only the Battery Pack LP-E6 can be used.  
Removing the Battery  
Open the cover and remove the  
battery.  
 
Press the battery release lever as shown  
by the arrow and remove the battery.  
  To prevent short circuiting, be sure to  
attach the protective cover to the  
battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Turning on the Power  
<1> : The camera turns on.  
<2>: The camera is turned off and  
does not operate. Set to this  
position when not using the  
camera.  
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor  
  Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the sensor  
cleaning will be executed automatically. During the sensor cleaning,  
the LCD monitor will display <f>. Even during the sensor  
cleaning, you can still shoot by pressing the shutter button halfway  
(p.35) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture.  
  If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short  
interval, the <f> icon might not be dplayed. This is normal and  
not a problem.  
About Auto Power Off  
  To save battery powr, the camera turns off automatically after about  
1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press  
the shutter button halfway (p.35).  
  You can change the auto power-off time with the menu’s [5 Auto  
power off] setting (p.44).  
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to  
the card, [Recording ...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after  
the card finishes recording the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Turning on the Power  
Checking the Battery Level  
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be  
indicated in one of six levels: A blinking battery icon (b) indicates  
that the battery will be exhausted soon.  
Icon  
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1  
0
Battery Life  
Temperature  
At 23°C / 73°F  
Approx. 1000  
Approx. 800  
At 0°C / 32°F  
Approx. 900  
Approx. 750  
No Flash  
50% Flash Use  
  The figures above are based on a y-chged Battery Pack LP-E6, no Live  
View shooting, and CIPA (Camerging Products Association) testing  
standards.  
  Battery Grip BG-E7 approximateldoubles the number of possible shots with  
two LP-E6 batteries installed. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the number  
of possible shots at 23°C / 73°F is approx. 400 shots without flash use and  
approx. 300 shots with 50% flash use.  
  The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following  
operations:  
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.  
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.  
• Using the LCD monitor often.  
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.  
  The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on  
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.  
  For battery life with Live View shooting, see page 133.  
  See the [7 Battery info.] menu to further check the battery’s condition  
(p.230).  
  If size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG-E7, a four-level  
indicator will be displayed. ([  
/
] will not be displayed.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
Installing and Removing the CF Card  
Although the thickness is different between the two types of CF  
(CompactFlash) cards, the camera is compatible with both types. It is  
also compatible with Ultra DMA (UDMA) cards and hard disk-type  
cards.  
Installing the Card  
Open the cover.  
  Slide the cover as shown by the  
1
arrow to open it.  
Label side  
Insert the card.  
2
3
  As shown in the illustration, face  
the labeside toward you and  
inthe end with the small holes  
ntthe camera.  
the card is inserted in the wrong  
way, it may damage the camera.  
X The card ejection button will stick out.  
Card ejection button  
Close the cover.  
  Close the cover and slide it in the  
direction shown by the arrow until it  
snaps shut.  
X When you set the power switch to  
<1>, the number of remaining shots  
will be displayed on the LCD panel.  
Shots remaining  
  The number of shots remaining depends on the remaining capacity of  
the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.  
  Setting the [1 Release shutter without card] menu option to [Disable]  
will prevent you from forgetting to install a card (p.238).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Installing and Removing the CF Card  
Removing the Card  
Open the cover.  
1
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  Make sure the access lamp is off,  
then open the cover.  
Access lamp  
Remove the card.  
2
  Press the card ejection button.  
X The card will come out.  
  Close the cover.  
Card ejection button  
  The access lamp lights or bhile the picture is taken, when  
data is being transfered to thrd and when data is being  
recorded, read, or eraed othe card. While the access lamp is lit  
or blinking, never do any of the following. Doing so may damage  
the image data. It may also damage the card or camera.  
• Opening the card slot cover.  
• Removing the battery.  
• Shaking or banging the camera around.  
  If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might  
not start from 0001 (p.80).  
  If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove  
and reinstall the card. If the error persists, use a different card.  
If you can transfer all the images in the card to a computer, transfer all  
the images and then format the card (p.43). The card may then return to  
normal.  
 
When holding a hard disk-type card, always hold its sides. You may  
damage the card by holding its flat surfaces. Compared to CF cards, hard  
disk-type cards are more vulnerable to vibration and physical shock. If  
you use such a card, be careful not to subject the camera to vibration or  
physical shock especially while recording or displaying images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
Attaching a Lens  
Remove the caps.  
  Remove the rear lens cap and the  
1
body cap by turning them as shown  
by the arrow.  
EF-S lens mount index  
Attach the lens.  
2
  Align the EF-S lens with the camera’s  
white EF-S lens mount index and turn  
the lens as shown by the arrow until it  
clicks in place.  
 
When attaching a lens other than an  
EF-S len, align the lens with the red  
Ens mount index.  
EF lens mount index  
thlens, set the focus mode  
3 ch to <AF> (autofocus).  
  If it is set to <MF> (manual focus),  
autofocus will not operate.  
Remove the front lens cap.  
4
Minimizing Dust  
  When changing lenses, do it in a place with minimal dust.  
  When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the  
body cap to the camera.  
  Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
About Zooming  
To zoom, turn the zoom ring on the lens  
with your fingers.  
If you want to zoom, do it before  
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after  
achieving focus may throw off the  
focus slightly.  
Detaching the Lens  
While pressing the lens release  
button, turn the lens as shown by  
the arrow.  
 
 
Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.  
Attach rear ens cap to the detached lens.  
To owners of the EF-S18-2m f3.5-5.6 IS lens:  
You n prevent the lens from extending  
ot while you are carrying it around. Set  
the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle  
end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever  
to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be  
locked only at the wide-angle end.  
  Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause  
loss of vision.  
  If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do  
not touch the rotating part.  
Image Conversion Factor  
Since the image sensor size is  
smaller than the 35mm film  
Image sensor size  
(22.3 x 14.9 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)  
format, it will look like the lens  
focal length is increased by 1.6x.  
35mm image size  
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
About the Lens Image Stabilizer  
When you use the IS lens’ built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is  
corrected to obtain a less blurred shot. The procedure explained here is  
based on the EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.  
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.  
Set the IS switch to <1>.  
1
  Set the camera’s power switch to  
<1>.  
Press the shutter button halfway.  
2
X The Image Stabilizer will operate.  
Take the picture.  
  When hpicture looks steady in the  
3
vnderpress the shutter button  
copletely to take the picture.  
  The Image Stabilizer is not effective for moving subjects.  
  The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as  
on a rocking boat.  
  With the EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens, the Image Stabilizer will  
not be very effective while you move the camera to take panned shots.  
  The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to  
either <AF> or <MF>.  
  If the camera is mounted on a tripod, you can save battery power by  
switching the IS switch to <2>.  
  The Image Stabilizer can operate even when the camera is mounted on  
a monopod.  
  Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the  
shooting conditions. However, the EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM, EF-  
S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS, and EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS lenses switch  
the IS mode automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity  
Turn the dioptric adjustment  
knob.  
  Turn the knob left or right so that the  
AF points in the viewfinder look  
sharp.  
  If the knob is difficult to turn, remove  
the eyecup (p.108).  
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder  
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is recommended.  
Holding the Camera  
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still minimize camera  
shake.  
Horizontal shooting  
Vertical shooting  
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.  
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.  
3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand’s index finger.  
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.  
5. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.  
6. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot in front of the other.  
For shooting while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 131.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
Basic Operation  
Shutter Button  
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button  
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.  
Pressing halfway  
This activates autofocusing and  
automatic exposure metering that sets  
the shutter speed and aperture.  
The exposure setting (shutter speed and  
aperture) is displayed on the LCD panel  
and in the viewfinder (0).  
Pressing completely  
This releases the shutter and takes the  
picture.  
Preventing Camera Sake  
Camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera  
shake. Camera shake can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera  
shake, note the following:  
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page.  
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then press the  
shutter button completely.  
  In the d/s/f/a/F modes, pressing the <p> button will  
execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway.  
  If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first  
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely  
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.  
  Even during the menu display, image playback, and image recording,  
you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter  
button halfway.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Basic Operation  
6Making Selections with the Main Dial  
After pressing a button, turn the  
(1)  
<6> dial.  
When you press a button, its function  
remains selected for 6 seconds (9).  
During this time, you can turn the <6>  
dial to set the desired setting.  
When the function turns off or if you  
press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will be ready to shoot.  
  Use this dial to select or set the  
metering mode, AF mode, ISO  
speed, AF point, etc.  
Turn t6> dial only.  
(2)  
Wloong at the viewfinder or LCD  
paurn the <6> dial to set the  
desired setting.  
  Use this dial to set the shutter speed,  
aperture, etc.  
9 Operating the Multi-controller  
The <9> consists of eight direction  
keys and a button at the center.  
  Use it to select the AF point, correct  
the white balance, move the AF point  
or magnifying frame during Live View  
shooting, scroll the playback image  
during magnified view, operate the  
Quick Control screen, etc.  
You can also use it to select or set  
menu options (except [3 Erase  
images] and [5 Format]).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
Basic Operation  
5Making Selections with the Quick Control Dial  
Before using the <5> dial, set the Quick Control Dial switch to <J>.  
(1)  
After pressing a button, turn the  
<5> dial.  
When you press a button, its function  
remains selected for 6 seconds (9).  
During this time, you can turn the <5>  
dial to set the desired setting.  
When the function turns off or if you  
press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will be ready to shoot.  
  Use this dial to select or set the white  
balance, drive mode, flash exposure  
censtion, AF point, etc.  
(2)  
rn he <5> dial only.  
e looking at the viewfinder or LCD  
panel, turn the <5> dial to set the  
desired setting.  
  Use this dial to set the exposure  
compensation amount, the aperture  
setting for manual exposures, etc.  
You can do step (1) even when the Quick Control Dial switch is set to  
<R>.  
ULCD Panel Illumination  
Turn on (9)/off the LCD panel  
illumination by pressing the <U> button.  
During a bulb exposure, pressing the  
shutter button completely will turn off the  
LCD panel illumination.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
Q Using the Quick Control Screen  
The shooting settings are displayed on the LCD monitor where you can  
directly select and set the functions. This is called the Quick Control  
screen.  
Display the Quick Control screen.  
  Press the <Q> button.  
X The Quick Control screen will appear  
(7).  
1
Set the desired setting.  
2
  Use <9> to select a function.  
  In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, the  
image-recording quality (p.58) and  
the drive mode for single shooting or  
10-sec. selfmer/remote control  
(p.930) can be selected.  
1 (Full Auto)  
X seected function is displayed on  
creen’s bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
d/s/f/a/F  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
3
take the picture.  
X The LCD monitor turns off and the  
captured image is displayed.  
Regarding the <C> (Creative Auto) mode, see page 53.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Q Using the Quick Control Screen  
Quick Control Screen Nomenclature  
Picture Style (p.64)  
ISO speed (p.62)  
Aperture (p.100)  
Shutter speed (p.98)  
Highlight tone priority*  
(p.209)  
Exposure compensation/  
Metering mode (p.103)  
AEB setting (p.105)  
Flash exposure  
compensation (p.113)  
Shooting mode* (p.20)  
AF area selection mode  
(p.87)  
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.75)  
Custom Controls (p.215)  
Image-recording  
quality (p.58)  
AF mode (p.84)  
White balance (p.70)  
Drive mode (p.93)  
Asterisked functions cannot be set whe Quck Control screen.  
Function Setting Dsplay  
  On the Quick Control screen, select  
the function and press <0>. The  
respective setting screen will then  
appear (except for the shutter speed  
and aperture).  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
  Press <0> to finalize the setting and  
<0>  
Ð
return to the Quick Control screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
3Menu Operations  
You can set various functions with the menus such as the image-  
recording quality, date/time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use  
the <M> button on the camera back and the <6> <5> dials.  
<M> button  
<6> Main Dial  
LCD monitor  
<5>  
Quick Control Dial  
<0> button  
Fully-Automatic Modes (1/C) Menu Screen  
* Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the fully-automatic  
modes.  
d/s/f/a/F Menu Screen  
5 Set-up  
3 Playback  
1 Shooting  
8
Custom Functions  
9 My Menu  
Tab  
Menu settings  
Menu items  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
3Menu Operations  
Menu Setting Procedure  
Display the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to display  
1
the menu.  
Select a tab.  
  Turn the <6> dial to select a tab.  
2
3
Select the desired item.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item,  
then press <0>.  
Selthe etting.  
Tuthe <5> dial to select the  
esied setting.  
4
  The current setting is indicated in  
blue.  
Set the desired setting.  
  Press <0> to set it.  
5
6
Exit the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to exit the  
menu and return to camera shooting.  
  The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have  
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.  
  You can also use <9> to set menu settings. (Except for [3 Erase  
images] and [5 Format].)  
  A list of menu functions is on page 238.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
Before You Start  
3 Setting the Interface Language  
Select [LanguageK].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select  
[LanguageK] (the third item from  
the top), then press <0>.  
Set the desired language.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to select  
the language, then press <0>.  
2
X The interface language will change.  
3Setting the Date and Time  
Check if the camera’s date and tiaret correctly. If necessary, set  
the correct date and time.  
Select [Date/Time].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Date/  
Time], then press <0>.  
Set the date, time and date display format.  
2
 
Turn the <5  
> dial to select the number.  
is displayed.  
  Press <0> so  
 
Turn the <  
setting, then press <  
5
> dial to select the desired  
> (Returns to  
0
).  
Exit the setting.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
3
X The date/time will be set and the  
menu will reappear.  
It is important to set the correct date/time because it will be recorded  
together with each captured image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Before You Start  
3Formatting the Card  
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or  
personal computer, formatting the card with the camera is recommended.  
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will  
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make  
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer  
the images to a personal computer, etc., before formatting the  
card.  
Select [Format].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [Format],  
1
then press <0>.  
ec[OK].  
urn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
2
then press <0>.  
X The card will be formatted.  
X When the formatting is completed,  
the menu will reappear.  
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management  
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware  
of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the card,  
destroy the card physically to prevent personal data from being leaked.  
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen might be smaller  
than the capacity indicated on the card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
Before You Start  
3Set the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off  
You can change the auto power-off time for the camera to turn off  
automatically after a certain period of non-operation. If you do not want  
the camera to turn off automatically, set this to [Off]. After the power  
turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter  
button or other button.  
Select [Auto power off].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
power off], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
Even if [Off] has been set, the LCD mowill tun off automatically after  
30 min. to save power. (The camepor does not turn off.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Before You Start  
3Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN  
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to  
the default.  
Select [Clear all camera settings].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Clear all  
1
camera settings], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
2
then press <0>.  
X Setting [Clear all camera settings]  
will reset the camera to the following  
deult stings:  
Shooting Settings  
On-Shot AF  
Image-recording Settings  
AF mode  
Quality  
73  
AF area  
selection mode  
Auto selection  
19-point AF  
One-touch  
RAW+JPEG  
1
73  
Picture Style  
Standard  
Standard  
q (Evaluative  
metering)  
Metering mode  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
ISO speed  
A (Auto)  
u (Single  
shooting)  
Peripheral  
illumination  
correction  
Enable/  
Correction  
data retained  
Drive mode  
Exposure  
compensation/AEB  
Canceled  
0 (Zero)  
Color space  
sRGB  
White balance  
WB correction  
WB-BKT  
Q (Auto)  
Canceled  
Canceled  
Continuous  
Enable  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
Custom Functions Unchanged  
File numbering  
Auto cleaning  
Dust Delete Data  
Erased  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
Before You Start  
Camera Settings  
Live View Shooting Settings  
Disable  
1 min.  
On  
VF grid display  
Auto power off  
Beep  
Live View  
Enable  
shooting  
AF mode  
Live mode  
Off  
Grid display  
Release shutter  
without card  
Enable  
Exposure  
simulation  
Enable  
Review time  
2 sec.  
Highlight alert  
Disable  
Silent shooting Mode 1  
Metering timer 16 sec.  
AF point display Disable  
Histogram  
Brightness  
10 images  
Movie Shooting Settings  
Image jump w/  
Auto rotate  
6
OnzD  
AF mode  
Live mode  
Off  
LCD brightness  
Date/Time  
Auto: Standard  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Grid dispay  
M-  
reing sze  
1920x1080 6  
Language  
Video system  
ound recording On  
ilent shooting Mode 1  
Metering timer 16 sec.  
INFO. button  
display options  
All items elected  
Camera user  
setting  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Copyright  
information  
My Menu settings Unchanged  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level  
The grid and electronic level can be displayed to help keep the camera  
aimed straight. The grid is displayed in the viewfinder, and the  
electronic level is displayed on the LCD monitor.  
Displaying the Grid  
Select [VF grid display].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [VF grid  
display], then press <0>.  
Select [Enable].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Enable],  
then press <0>.  
  The grid will be displayed in the  
viewfindr.  
2
The grid can also be displayed during Live View shooting and movie  
shooting (p.136, 156).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level  
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor  
Press the <B> button.  
1
  Each time you press the <B>  
button, the screen display will  
change.  
  Display the electronic level.  
  If the electronic level does not  
appear, set the menu’s [7 INFO.  
button display options] option to  
display the electronic level (p.228).  
Check camera’s roll and pitch.  
2
  e hizontal and vertical tilt are  
ayed in 1° increments.  
  Tred line turning green indicates  
that the tilt is corrected.  
Vertical level  
Horizontal level  
  Even when the tilt is corrected, there is a margin of error of ±1°.  
  If the camera is significantly tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error  
will be greater.  
  The electronic level can also be displayed during Live View shooting and  
movie shooting (p.134, 152).  
  The electronic level can also be displayed in the viewfinder using the AF  
point display (p.221).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Basic Shooting  
This chapter explains how to ushe flly-automatic  
modes (1/C) on the Mode Dfor best results.  
With the fully-automatic mode/C), all you do is point  
and shoot and the camra sets everything automatically  
(p.236). Also, to prevent bothed pictures due to mistaken  
operations, major shooting settings cannot be changed in the  
fully-automatic modes.  
Fully-  
automatic  
modes  
About the Auto Lighting Optimizer  
In fully-automatic modes (1/C), the Auto Lighting Optimizer will  
adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness  
and contrast. The Auto Lighting Optimizer is also enabled by  
default in all shooting modes (p.75).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
1 Fully Automatic Shooting  
Set the Mode Dial to <1>.  
1
Area AF frame  
Aim the Area AF frame over the  
2 target subject.  
  All the AF points will be used to focus,  
and generally the closest object will  
be focused.  
  Aiming the center of the Area AF  
frame over the subject will make  
focusing easier.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the sutter button halfway, and  
3
the lefocsing ring will rotate to  
focus
X AF point(s) which achieve(s)  
s will be displayed. At the same  
time, the beeper will sound and the  
focus confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder will light.  
X Under low-light conditions, the  
viewfinder will flash in red to  
illuminate the AF point.  
X If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-  
up automatically.  
Focus confirmation light  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
4
take the picture.  
X The captured image will be displayed  
for about 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.  
  If the built-in flash has popped up,  
you can push it back down with your  
fingers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
1 Fully Automatic Shooting  
FAQ  
  The focus confirmation light <o> blinks and focus is not  
achieved.  
Aim the center of the Area AF frame over an area having good contrast,  
then press the shutter button halfway (p.92). If you are too close to the  
subject, move away and try again.  
  Sometimes multiple AF points light up simultaneously.  
All those AF points have achieved focus. As long as the AF point  
covering the desired subject lights up, you can take the picture.  
  The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation  
light <o> does not light.)  
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject.  
(The focus confirmation light <o> does nt light.) You can shoot a  
moving subject in focus.  
  Pressing the shutter butthaay does not focus the subject.  
If the focus mode switch on s iset to <MF> (Manual Focus), set it  
to <AF> (Auto Focus.  
  Although it is daylight, he flash popped up.  
For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help reduce the subject’s  
dark shadow.  
  In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.  
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to fire a  
series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AF-assist  
beam. It is effective up to approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet away.  
  Although flash was used, the picture came out dark.  
The subject was too far away. The subject should be within 5 meters/16.4  
feet from the camera.  
  When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out  
unnaturally dark.  
The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created by the lens  
barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the camera. If a  
hood has been attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
1 Full Auto Techniques  
Recomposing the Shot  
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to  
create a balanced background and good perspective.  
In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, while you press the shutter button  
halfway to focus a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then  
recompose the shot and press the shutter butn completely to take the  
picture. This is called “focus lock”.  
Shooting a Moving Sbject  
In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera  
changes) during or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus  
the subject continuously. As long as you keep aiming the AF point on  
the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will  
be continuous. When you want to take the picture, press the shutter  
button completely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
The <1> Full Auto mode takes care of everything, whereas the <C>  
Creative Auto mode enables you to easily change the picture’s  
brightness, depth of field, color tone (Picture Style), etc. The default  
settings are the same as the <1> (Full Auto) mode.  
* CA stands for Creative Auto.  
Set the Mode Dial to <C>.  
1
X The Creative Auto screen appears on  
the LCD monitor.  
Press the <Q> button.  
2
  You can use <9> to select a  
function. (7)  
  For details about each function, see  
page 54-55.  
t te desired setting.  
3
se <9> to select a function.  
X A brief description of the selected  
function is displayed on the screen’s  
bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
Take the picture.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
4
take the picture.  
If you change the shooting mode or if the power turns off via auto power off  
(p.44) or by the power switch being set to <2>, the Creative Auto settings  
will revert to the default. However, the image-recording quality, self-timer  
and remote control settings will be retained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
(1)  
Shutter speed and aperture  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
Possible shots  
Battery check  
Maximum burst  
(1) Flash firing  
<a> (Auto firing), <D> (Flas), o<b> (Flash off) can be  
selected.  
(2) Blurring/sharpening te background  
If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look  
more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will  
look more in focus.  
Depending on the lens and shooting conditions, the background  
might not look so blurred. This setting cannot be set (grayed out)  
while the built-in flash is popped up. When flash is used, it will not be  
applied.  
(3) Adjusting the picture brightness  
If you move the index mark toward the left, the picture will look  
darker. If you move it toward the right, the picture will look brighter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
C Creative Auto Shooting  
(4) Image effects  
Besides the standard image effect, you can set it for portraits,  
landscapes, or black-and-white photos. (p.64: Picture Style)  
<P> (Standard): Standard image effect applicable to most  
scenes.  
<Q> (Smooth skin tones): Effective for close-ups of women or  
children.  
<R> (Vivid blues and greens): For impressive landscapes.  
<V> (Monochrome image): Creates black-and-white photos.  
(5) Single, continuous, and self-timer shooting  
<i> (Low-speed continuous shooting): Shoot continuously at a  
maximum of about 3 frames per econd (fps).  
<Q> (10-sec. self-timer/Remontro): See the “Using the Self-  
timer” note ( ) on . Rmote control shooting is also  
possible. (p.110)  
* By pressing the <o> bn, you can display the [Drive mode]  
selection screen and st thsame settings.  
(6) Image-recording quality  
To set the image-recording quality, see “Setting the Image-recording  
Quality” on page 58-60. By pressing <0>, you can display the  
[Quality] selection screen and set the same settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
3Setting the Image Review Time  
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor  
immediately after capture. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To  
not have the image displayed, set [Off].  
Select [Review time].  
1
  Under the [1] tab, select [Review  
time], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time  
elapses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Image Settings  
This chapter explains image-reld function settings:  
Image-recording quality, ISO sp, Picture Style, white  
balance, Auto Lighting Oper, lens peripheral  
illumination correction, etc.  
  In fully-automatic modes 1/C), only the image-  
recording quality, lens peripheral illumination correction,  
and file numbering method can be set as explained in this  
chapter. Folders can also be created and selected.  
 
The  
the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to <  
>.  
M
icon on the upper right of the page title indicates that  
d
/
s
/f/a/F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
3Setting the Image-recording Quality  
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Six JPEG recording  
quality settings are provided: 73/83/74/84/76/86. Three  
RAW recording quality settings are provided:  
1
,
41, and 61.  
RAW images must be processed with the provided software (p.60).  
Select [Quality].  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Quality],  
1
then press <0>.  
Select the image-recording quality.  
2
  To select a RAW setting, turn the  
<6> dial. To select a JPEG setting,  
turn the <5> dial.  
 
On the upper right, the “***M (megapixels)  
**** x ****” number indicates the recorded  
pixel t, an[***] is the number of  
ssibshots (displayed up to 999).  
  s <0> to set it.  
Image-recording Quality Stting Examples  
73 only  
1 only  
1+73  
61+74  
* If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
3Setting the Image-recording Quality  
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)  
Pixels  
(megapixels)  
Printing File Size Possible Maximum  
Quality  
Size  
(MB)  
Shots  
Burst  
73  
83  
74  
6.6  
593  
94 (126)  
Approx. 17.9  
(17.9M)  
A2 or larger  
3.3  
1169  
1122  
2178  
1739  
3297  
469 (1169)  
454 (1122)  
2178 (2178)  
1739 (1739)  
3297 (3297)  
3.5  
Approx. 8.0  
(8M)  
JPEG  
Around A3  
Around A4  
84  
76  
86  
1.8  
2.2  
Approx. 4.5  
(4.5M)  
1.1  
Approx. 17.9  
(17.9M)  
1
RAW 41  
61  
A2 or larger  
Around A3  
Around A4  
25.1  
17.1  
155  
229  
345  
122  
15 (15)  
24 (24)  
38 (38)  
6 (6)  
Approx. 10.1  
(10M)  
Approx. 4.5  
(4.5M)  
11.4  
1
73  
Approx. 17.9 A2 or larger  
Approx. 17.9 A2 or
21+6.6  
RAW  
41  
+
Approx. 10.1  
Approx. 17.9 arger  
und 3  
17.1+6.6  
11.4+6.6  
164  
217  
6 (6)  
6 (6)  
73  
JPEG  
61  
73  
Appro4.5 And A4  
Approx. 7.9 A2 or larger  
  Figures for the file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous  
shooting are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO 100 and Standard  
Picture Style) using a 4GB card. These figures will vary depending on the  
subject, card brand, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom Functions, etc.  
  The maximum burst applies to high-speed continuous shooting. Figures in  
parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 4GB card based on Canon’s  
testing standards.  
  If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded  
simultaneously to the card in both types at the selected image-recording  
quality. The two images will be saved in the same folder with the same  
file numbers (file extension .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).  
  The icons are read as follows: 1 (RAW), 41 (Medium RAW),  
61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 7 (Fine), 8 (Normal), 3 (Large), 4  
(Medium), and 6 (Small).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
3Setting the Image-recording Quality  
About RAW  
A RAW image is the data output by the image sensor, converted to  
digital data and recorded on the card as is. You can select from 1,  
41, or 61 (Commonly referred as RAW in this manual).  
With RAW images, you can use the provided software to make various  
adjustments as desired and then generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image.  
Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images.  
Using the provided software is recommended.  
Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting indicated on the  
preceding page is the number of continuous sots that can be taken  
without stopping, based on a formatteB cad.  
Tumer is displayed on the bottom  
righe viewfinder. If the maximum  
burst is 99 or higher, “99” will be  
dsplayed.  
  The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the  
camera. Make sure that a card is loaded before taking a picture.  
  If [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] is set to [2: Strong],  
the maximum burst will be greatly reduced (p.208).  
If the viewfinder displays “99” for the maximum burst, it means the maximum  
burst is 99 or higher. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the  
internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel and shooting will be disabled temporarily.  
If you stop the continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After  
all the captured images are written to the card, the maximum burst will be as  
listed on page 59.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
3Setting the Image-recording Quality  
One-touch RAW+JPEGN  
If the current recording quality is JPEG only, you can press the <P>  
button to also capture a RAW image (1 by default) at the same  
time. If the current recording quality is RAW only, press the button to  
also capture a JPEG image (73 by default).  
This button will not work if the camera is already set (p.58) to  
capture RAW and JPEG images at the same time.  
Select [One-touch RAW+JPEG].  
1
  Under the [y] tab, select [One-  
touch RAW+JPEG], then press  
<0>.  
Select RAW or JPEG.  
2
  Turn the 5> dial and select RAW or  
J, then press <0>.  
ecthe image-recording  
3 lity.  
 
Turn the <  
5
> dial to select the image-  
>.  
recording quality, then press <  
0
Take the picture.  
  Press the <P> button.  
X The image-recording quality will blink  
on the LCD panel. To cancel the  
setting, press the <P> button again.  
  Press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture.  
4
X After the picture is taken, the setting  
will be canceled.  
 
This setting can also be combined with white balance bracketing and AEB shooting.  
  You can also cancel the setting by pressing the <Q>, <M>, <A>,  
or <x> button or operating the Live View shooting/Movie shooting  
switch or power switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN  
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the  
ambient light level. In the fully-automatic modes (1/C), the ISO  
speed is set automatically (p.63).  
Press the <m> button. (9)  
1
Set the ISO speed.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel or  
viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.  
  It can be set within ISO 100-6400 in  
1/3-stop incements.  
  With “A” selcted, the ISO speed will  
be stomatically (p.63).  
ISO Speed Guide  
Shooing ituation  
ISO Speed  
Flash Range  
(No flash)  
100 - 400  
400 - 1600  
Sunny outdoors  
The higher the ISO speed,  
Overcast skies or evening time the farther the flash range  
will be (p.112).  
1600 - 6400, H  
Dark indoors or night  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the  
settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - 6400 (p.209).  
  Using a high ISO speed or shooting in high-temperature conditions may  
result in more grainy images. Long exposures can also cause irregular  
colors in the image.  
  When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (horizontal banding, dots of  
light, etc.) may appear.  
With [8C.Fn I -3: ISO expansion] set to [1: On], “H” (equivalent to ISO  
12800) can also be set (p.206).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN  
About “A” (Auto) ISO Speed  
If the ISO speed is set to “A”, the actual  
ISO speed to be set will be displayed  
when you press the shutter button  
halfway. As indicated below, the ISO  
speed will be set automatically to suit the  
shooting mode.  
Shooting Mode  
1/C/d/s/f/a  
F
ISO Speed Setting  
ISO 100 - 3200  
Fixed at ISO 400  
Fixed at ISO 400*  
With flash  
* If fill flash results in overexposure, ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set.  
* If the shooting mode is <d> or fully-automatic 1/C) and bounce flash is  
used with an external Speedlite, the ISO eed ill be set automatically within  
400 - 1600.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
A
Selecting a Picture StyleN  
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image effects matching  
your photographic expression or the subject.  
In the <1> (Full Auto) mode, you cannot select the Picture Style.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
  When the camera is ready to shoot,  
press the <A> button.  
X The Picture Style screen will appear.  
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
a Picture Style, then press <0>.  
X The Picture Style will take effect and  
the camera will be ready to shoot.  
You can also use the [2 Pictur] mnu to select the Picture Style.  
Picture Style Effects  
P Standard (C: Standard)  
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose  
Picture Style suitable for most scenes. This is set automatically in  
the <1> (Full Auto) mode.  
Q Portrait (C: Smooth skin tones)  
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Effective for close-ups  
of women or children.  
By changing the [Color tone] (p.66), you can adjust the skin tone.  
R Landscape (C: Vivid blues and greens)  
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.  
Effective for impressive landscapes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
A Selecting a Picture StyleN  
S Neutral  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.  
U Faithful  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. When the subject is captured under a daylight color  
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match  
the subject’s color. The image is dull and subdued.  
V Monochrome (C: Monochrome image)  
Creates black-and-white images.  
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If  
you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the  
[Monochrome] setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is  
selected, <0> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
W User Def. 1-3  
You can register a basic sucas [Portrait], [Landscape], a  
Picture Style file, etc., and t it as desired (p.68). Any User-  
Defined Picture Stylwhich has not been set will have the same  
settings as the Standard Picture Style.  
About the Symbols  
The symbols on the top of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters  
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the parameter  
settings, such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each Picture Style.  
Symbols  
g
h
i
j
k
l
Sharpness  
Contrast  
Saturation  
Color tone  
Filter effect (Monochrome)  
Toning effect (Monochrome)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
A
Customizing a Picture StyleN  
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters  
like [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take test  
shots. To customize [Monochrome], see the next page.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
a Picture Style, then press the  
<B> button.  
Select a parameter.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
parameter, then press <0>.  
Set the parameter.  
4
  Turn the <5> dial to set the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>.  
  Press the <M> button to save the  
adjusted parameter. The Picture Style  
selection screen will reappear.  
X Any settings different from the default  
will be displayed in blue.  
Parameter Settings and Effects  
g Sharpness  
h Contrast  
0: Less sharp outline  
-4: Low contrast  
+7: Sharp outline  
+4: High contrast  
i Saturation  
j Color tone  
-4: Low saturation  
-4: Reddish skin tone  
+4: High saturation  
+4: Yellowish skin tone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
A Customizing a Picture StyleN  
  By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective  
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.  
  To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on the  
preceding page to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.  
Monochrome Adjustment  
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in  
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding  
page.  
kFilter Effect  
With a filter effect applied to a  
monochrome image, you can make  
white clouds or green trees stand out  
mor
Filter  
N: None  
Sample Effects  
Normal blac-anwhite image with no filter effects.  
Ye: Yellow  
Or: Orange  
R: Red  
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.  
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.  
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.  
Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.  
G:Green  
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.  
lToning Effect  
By applying a toning effect, you can  
create a monochrome image in that  
color. It can make the image look more  
impressive.  
The following can be selected: [N:None]  
[S:Sepia] [B:Blue] [P:Purple]  
[G:Green].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
A
Registering a Picture StyleN  
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],  
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],  
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].  
You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as for sharpness  
and contrast are different. You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style  
which has been registered to the camera with the provided software.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
2
Select [User Def.].  
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
[User Def. *], then press the <B>  
button.  
P<0>.  
  [Picture Style] selected, press  
3
<0>.  
Select the base Picture Style.  
4
  Turn the <5> dial to select the base  
Picture Style, then press <0>.  
 
To adjust the parameters of a Picture  
Style which has been registered to the  
camera with the provided software,  
select the Picture Style here.  
Select a parameter.  
  Select a parameter such as  
[Sharpness], then press <0>.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
A Registering a Picture StyleN  
Set the parameter.  
6
  Turn the <5> dial to set the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>.  
For details, see “Customizing a  
Picture Style” on pages 66-67.  
  Press the <M> button to register  
the new Picture Style. The Picture  
Style selection screen will then  
reappear.  
X The base Picture Style will be  
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].  
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *], changing  
the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter settings of the  
registered Picture Style.  
To shoot with the registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on the preceding  
page to select [User Def. *] and then shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
B:Setting the White BalanceN  
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,  
the <  
looking colors cannot be obtained with <  
balance for each light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.  
Q
> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-  
Q
>, you can select the white  
In the fully-automatic modes (  
1/C), <Q> is set automatically.  
Press the <n> button. (9)  
1
2
Select the white balance.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <5> dial.  
Display  
Q
W
Mode  
Coloperaure (Approx. K: Kelvin)  
Auto  
3000 - 7000  
5200  
Daylight  
Shade  
E
R
Y
7000  
Cloudy, twilight, sunset  
Tungsten light  
6000  
3200  
U
White fluorescent light  
Flash use  
4000  
I
6000  
O
Custom (p.71)  
2000 - 10000  
2500 - 10000  
P
Color temperature (p.72)  
About White Balance  
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting.  
With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with software to make  
the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as the basis for the color  
correction. The result is natural-looking colors in the pictures.  
You can also use the [2 White balance] menu to set the white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
B: Setting the White BalanceN  
O Custom White Balance  
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance  
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Do this procedure under  
the actual light source to be used.  
Photograph a white object.  
1
  Look through the viewfinder and the  
area within the dotted line should  
cover a solid-white object.  
  Focus manually and set the standard  
exposure for the white object.  
  You can set any white balance.  
Select [Custom WB].  
2
  Under h[2] tab, select [Custom  
Wthen press <0>.  
Thcustom white balance selection  
creen will appear.  
Import the white balance data.  
3
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
the image captured in step 1, then  
press <0>.  
X On the dialog screen which appears,  
select [OK] and the data will be  
imported.  
  When the menu reappears, press the  
<M> button to exit the menu.  
Press the <n> button. (9)  
4
Select the custom white balance.  
5
  Look at the LCD panel and turn the  
<5> dial to select <O>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
B: Setting the White BalanceN  
  If the exposure obtained in step 1 is way off, a correct white balance  
might not be obtained.  
  If the image was captured while the Picture Style was set to  
[Monochrome] (p.65), it cannot be selected in step 3.  
  Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can  
produce a more accurate white balance.  
  The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be  
registered under <O>. If you do step 3, the data for the registered  
personal white balance will be erased.  
P Setting the Color Temperature  
You can set the white balance’s color temperaure numerically in Kelvin.  
This is for advanced users.  
Sect [hite balance].  
1
  r the [2] tab, select [White  
bance], then press <0>.  
Set the color temperature.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [P].  
  Turn the <6> dial to set the color  
temperature, then press <0>.  
  The color temperature can be set  
from 2500K to 10000K in 100K  
increments.  
  When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white  
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.  
  If you want to set <P> to the reading taken with a commercially-  
available color temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting  
to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter’s  
reading and the camera’s color temperature reading.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
uWhite Balance CorrectionN  
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment  
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color  
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color  
can be corrected to one of nine levels.  
This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature  
conversion or color compensating filters.  
White Balance Correction  
Select [WB SHIFT/BKT].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [WB  
SHIFT/BKT], then press <0>.  
Set whie balance correction.  
2
se <9> to move the “ ” mark to the  
esired position.  
  B is for blue, A is amber, M is  
magenta, and G is green. The color in  
the respective direction will be  
Sample setting: A2, G1  
corrected.  
  On the upper right, “SHIFT” indicates  
the direction and correction amount.  
  Pressing the <B> button will  
cancel all the [WB SHIFT/BKT]  
settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
  During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
  One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color  
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the  
density of a color temperature conversion filter.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
uWhite Balance CorrectionN  
White Balance Auto Bracketing  
With just one shot, three images having a different color tone can be recorded  
simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance  
setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/green  
bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White balance  
bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.  
Set the white balance bracketing  
amount.  
 
In step 2 for white balance correction, when  
you turn the < > dial, the “ mark on the  
screen will change to “ (3 points).  
5
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/A  
bracketing, and turning it to the left sets the  
M/G bketin.  
B/A bias ±3 levels  
X On thght side of the screen, “BKT”  
ats the bracketing direction and  
racketing amount.  
 
Pressing the <  
B> button will cancel  
all the [WB SHIFT/BKT] settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
Bracketing Sequence  
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, 3. Green (G) bias.  
 
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be  
lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the  
normal number. Also, the white balance icon will blink on the LCD panel.  
  You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white  
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance  
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.  
 
Since three images are recorded for one shot, the card will take longer to record the shot.  
  BKT” stands for Bracketing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
3Auto Lighting OptimizerN  
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and  
contrast can be corrected automatically. With JPEG images, the  
correction is done when the image is captured. For RAW images, it can  
be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
The default setting is [Standard].  
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [Auto  
1
Lighting Optimizer], then press  
<0>.  
Set the correction setting.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
Take the pcture.  
  Tmagwill be recorded with the  
3
brihtness and contrast corrected if  
ecessary.  
B
Sample of corrected brightness  
  Depending on the shooting conditions, noise might increase.  
  If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure  
compensation, flash exposure compensation, or manual exposure to  
darken the exposure, the image might still come out bright. If you want  
the darker exposure, set this to [Disable] first.  
In fully-automatic modes (1/C), [Standard] will be set automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
3
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
Due to the lens characteristics, the four corners of the picture might look  
darker. This is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral illumination.  
With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured.  
For RAW images, it can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional  
(provided software).  
The default setting is [Enable].  
Select [Peripheral illumin.  
correct.].  
  Under the [1] tab, select  
[Peripheral illumin. correct.], then  
press <0>.  
1
Set the correction setting.  
2
  On the scren, check that the  
attalens[Correction data  
ailale] is displayed.  
  orrection data not available] is  
dlayed, see “About the Lens  
Correction Data” on the next page.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Enable],  
then press <0>.  
Take the picture.  
  The image will be recorded with the  
3
corrected peripheral illumination.  
Correction enabled  
Correction disabled  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
3Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
About the Lens Correction Data  
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction  
data for about 25 lenses. In step 2, if you select [Enable], the peripheral  
light correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose  
correction data has been registered in the camera.  
With the EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses  
have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also  
register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the  
Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility.  
  For JPEG images aready captured, lens peripheral illumination  
correction cannot be applied.  
  Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image  
periphery.  
  When using a third-party lens, setting the correction to [Disable] is  
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.  
  Lens peripheral illumination correction is applied even when an Extender  
is attached.  
  If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the  
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to  
[Disable].  
  The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum  
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
  If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will  
be lower.  
  The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images  
are to be saved.  
This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving  
captured images.  
Create a Folder  
Select [Select folder].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Select  
folder], then press <0>.  
Select [Creae folder].  
2
  Turn <5> dial to select [Create  
foldethen press <0>.  
Create a new folder.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
X A new folder with a higher one-up  
folder number is created.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
Selecting a Folder  
Lowest file number  
  With the Select folder screen  
Number of images  
in folder  
displayed, turn the <5> dial to select  
the desired folder, then press <0>.  
X The folder where the captured  
images will be saved will be selected.  
  Subsequent captured images will be  
recorded into the selected folder.  
Folder name  
Highest file number  
About Folders  
As with “100EOS7D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits  
(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain  
up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new  
folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if  
manual reset (p.81) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.  
Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.  
Creating Folders with a Personal Computer  
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open  
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and  
organize your images. The folder name must follow the “100ABC_D” format  
where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric  
characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case  
letters from A to Z, numerals, and an underscore “_”. There can be no space in  
the folder name. Also, folder names cannot have the same three-digit number  
such as “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ” even if the letters are different.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
3File Numbering Methods  
The file number is like the frame number on a roll of film. The captured  
images are assigned a sequential file number from 0001 to 9999 and  
saved in one folder. You can change how the file number is assigned.  
The file number will appear on a computer in this format:  
IMG_0001.JPG.  
Select [File numbering].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [File  
numbering], then press <0>.  
Select the file numbering method.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired method, then press <0>.  
Continuous  
Continues the file numbering sequene evn after the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Even after you replace the card ate a new folder, the file  
numbering continues in sequenco 9999. This is convenient when  
you want to save the imags numbered anywhere between 0001 to  
9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal  
computer.  
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might  
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use a  
newly-formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card-1  
Card-1  
Card-2  
100  
XXX-0051  
101  
XXX-0052  
XXX-0051  
XXX-0052  
Next sequential file number  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
3File Numbering Methods  
Auto Reset  
Restarting the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created, the file  
numbering starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to organize  
images according to cards or folders. If the replacement card or existing  
folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering  
of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing  
images in the card or folder. If you want to save images with the file  
numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card-1  
Card-1  
Card-2  
100  
XX-0051  
101  
XXX-0001  
XXX-0051  
100-0001  
File numbering is
Manual Reset  
To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number  
0001 in a new folder.  
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created  
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts  
from 0001. This is convenient when you want to use different folders for  
the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After  
the manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.  
If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be  
possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will  
display a message to replace the card. Replace with a new card.  
For both JPEG and RAW images, the file name will start with “IMG_”. Movie  
file names will start with “MVI_”. The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG  
images, “.CR2” for RAW images, and “.MOV” for movies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
3Setting the Color SpaceN  
The color space refers to the range of reproducible colors. With this  
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or  
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.  
In the fully-automatic modes (1/C), sRGB is set automatically.  
Select [Color space].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Color  
space], then press <0>.  
Set the desired color space.  
2
  Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then  
press <0>.  
About Adobe RGB  
This color space is mainly used fommercial printing and other  
industrial uses. This setting is nt recommended if you do not know  
about image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File  
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). The image will look very subdued in the sRGB  
personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with  
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of  
the image with software will therefore be required.  
  If the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB, the file  
name will start with “_MG_” (first character is an underscore).  
 
The ICC profile is not appended. The ICC profile is explained in the  
Software Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
Setting the AF and  
Drive Modes  
The 19 AF pnts n the viewfinder  
make AF shting suitable for a  
wide y of subjects and  
cenes
You can also select the AF mode and drive mode best  
matching the shooting conditions and subject.  
  The M icon on the upper right of the page title indicates  
that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to  
<d/s/f/a/F>.  
  In fully-automatic modes (1/C), the AF mode, AF point  
selection, and drive mode are set automatically.  
<AF> stands for auto focus. <MF> stands for manual focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
f: Selecting the AF ModeN  
Select the AF mode suiting the shooting conditions or subject. In fully-  
automatic modes (1/C), “AI Focus AF” is set automatically.  
On the lens, set the focus mode  
switch to <AF>.  
1
Press the <o> button. (9)  
2
Select the Amode.  
  Whilking at the LCD panel, turn  
3
<6> dial.  
X: One-Shot AF  
9: AI Focus AF  
Z: AI Servo AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
f: Selecting the AF ModeN  
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects  
Suited for still subjects. When you  
press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will focus only once.  
  When focus is achieved, the AF point  
which achieved focus will be  
displayed, and the focus confirmation  
light <o> in the viewfinder will also  
light.  
AF point  
Focus confirmation light  
  With evaluative metering, the  
exposure setting will be set at the  
same time focus is achieved.  
  While you hold down the shutter  
button hfway, the focus will be  
ld. You can then recompose the  
shif desired.  
the d/s/f/a/F shooting  
modes, AF is also possible by  
pressing the <p> button.  
  If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, a picture cannot be taken even if the  
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to  
focus again. Or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.92).  
  If the [1 Beep] menu is set to [Off], the beeper will not sound when  
focus is achieved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
f: Selecting the AF ModeN  
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects  
This AF mode is for moving subjects  
when the focusing distance keeps  
changing. While you hold down the  
shutter button halfway, the subject  
will be focused continuously.  
  The exposure is set at the moment  
the picture is taken.  
  In the d/s/f/a/F shooting  
modes, AF is also possible by  
pressing the <p> button.  
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.  
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.  
AI Focus AF for Automatitching of AF Mode  
AI Focus AF switches the AF mode  
fom One-Shot AF to AI Servo AF  
automatically if the still subject starts  
moving.  
  After the subject is focused in the  
One-Shot AF mode, if the subject  
starts moving, the camera will detect  
the movement and change the AF  
mode automatically to AI Servo AF.  
When focus is achieved in the AI Focus AF mode with the Servo mode  
active, the beeper will sound softly. However, the focus confirmation light  
<o> in the viewfinder will not light.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
SSelecting the AF AreaN  
Default AF Area Selection Modes  
As default setting, the following three AF area selection modes can be  
selected. See the next page for the selection procedure.  
Single-point AF (Manual selection) (p.89)  
Select one AF point to focus.  
Zone AF (Manual selection of a zone) (p.90)  
The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for  
focusing.  
Auto select 19-poinAF (p.90)  
All the AF poine used to focus. Set in fully-  
automatic ode1/C).  
AF Area Selection Modes Added with Custom Functions  
With [8C.Fn III -6: Select AF area selec. mode] (p.212), the following  
two AF area selection modes can be added.  
Spot AF (Manual selection) (p.89)  
For pinpoint focusing.  
AF point expansion (Manual selection) (p.89)  
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent  
AF points <w> are used to focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
SSelecting the AF AreaN  
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode  
Select the AF area selection  
mode.  
  Press the <S> button. (9)  
  Look through the viewfinder and  
press the <B> button.  
X Press the <B> button to change  
the AF area selection mode.  
By default, the button changes the  
mode to single-point AF, Zone AF,  
and 19-point AF.  
Selecting the AF Point Manually  
Press the <S> button. (9)  
X The AF points will be displayed in  
iewfinder.  
1
  ne AF has been set, the selected  
zone will also be displayed.  
Select the AF point.  
2
  The AF point selection will change in  
the direction you tilt the <9>. If you  
press <9> straight down, the center  
AF point (or zone) will be selected.  
  You can also use the <6> and  
<5> dials to select the AF point. The  
<6> dial selects an AF point in the  
horizontal direction, and the <5>  
dial selects an AF point in the vertical  
direction.  
With [8C.Fn III -7: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern], you can set either [0:  
Stops at AF area edges] or [1: Continuous] (p.212).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
AF Area Selection Modes  
The AF areas are explained starting with the smallest one.  
C.Fn III -6  
(1) Spot AF (Manual selection)  
Although this is the same as single-point AF, the  
selected AF point <O> covers a smaller pinpoint  
area to focus. Effective for pinpoint focusing  
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.  
Since Spot AF covers a very small area, focusing  
might be difficult during hand-held shooting or for a  
moving subject.  
(2) Single-point AF (Manual selection)  
Select one AF point <S> to be used to focus.  
C.Fn III -6  
(3) AF point expanion (Manual selection)  
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w> are  
used to focus. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with  
just one AF point.  
With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected AF point <S> must focus-  
track the subject first. However, it is easier to focus the target subject  
than with Zone AF.  
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with the expanded AF point,  
the expanded AF point <S> will also be displayed along with the  
manually-selected AF point <S>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
AF Area Selection Modes  
(4) Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)  
The 19 AF points are divided into five zones for focusing. All the AF  
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the  
AF point. It makes achieving focus easier than with single-point AF or  
AF point expansion and it is effective for moving subjects. However,  
since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject, focusing a specific target  
is harder than with single-point AF or AF point expansion.  
With One-Shot AF, the AF point <S> which achieved focus will be  
displayed.  
(5) 19-point AF auto selection  
All the AF points are used to focutomatically set in fully-automatic  
modes (1/C).  
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button  
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> which  
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,  
it means they all have achieved focus. This mode  
tends to focus the nearest subject.  
With AI Servo AF, the manually-selected (p.88) AF  
point <S> is used first to achieve focus. This  
cannot be set in fully-automatic modes (1/C).  
With 19-point AF and Zone AF, the active AF point will keep switching to  
track the subject in AI Servo AF mode. However, under certain shooting  
conditions (such as when the subject is small), it might not be able to track  
the subject. Also, in low temperatures, the tracking response is slower.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
AF Area Selection Modes  
  If [8C.Fn III -12: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [1: Select  
different AF points], you can set the AF area selection mode and  
manually-selected AF point (or zone in the case of Zone AF) separately  
for vertical and horizontal shooting (p.214).  
  If [8C.Fn III -10: Focus display in AI SERVO/MF] is set to [Disable],  
the active AF points <S> during AI Servo AF will not be displayed.  
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash  
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,  
the built-in flash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to  
enable easier autofocusing.  
  The built-in flash’s AF-assist beam is effetive up to about 4 meters/13.1  
feet.  
  In the d/s/f/a/F shootindes, pess the <I> button to pop-  
up the built-in flash. Then il firhe AF-assist beam when necessary.  
Lens’ Maximum Aperture and AF Sensitivity  
With lenses whose maximum aperture is larger than f/5.6  
With all AF points, cross-type AF sensitive to both vertical and  
horizontal lines is possible.  
With lenses whose maximum aperture is larger than f/2.8*  
With the center AF point, high-precision, cross-type AF sensitive to both  
vertical and horizontal lines is possible. The center AF point’s sensitivity  
to vertical and horizontal lines is about twice as sensitive as the other  
AF points.  
The remaining 18 AF points will work as cross-type points with lenses  
brighter than f/5.6.  
* Except with the EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM and EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
When Autofocus Fails  
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light <o>  
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:  
Subjects difficult to focus  
  Very low-contrast subjects  
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)  
  Subjects in very low light  
  Extremely backlit or reflective subjects  
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)  
  Near and far subjects covered by an AF point  
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)  
  Repetitive patterns  
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)  
In such cases, do one of the following:  
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the  
subject and lock the focus before rmposng (p.52).  
(2) Set the lens focus mode switco <F> and focus manually.  
MF: Manual Focusing  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
1
2
Focus the subject.  
  Focus by turning the lens focusing  
ring until the subject looks sharp in  
the viewfinder.  
Focusing ring  
If you press the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point  
which achieved focus will be displayed and the focus confirmation light  
<o> will light in the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
i Selecting the Drive ModeN  
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. In the <1> (Full  
Auto) mode, single shooting is set automatically.  
Press the <o> button. (9)  
1
Select the drive mode.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
2
the <5> dial.  
u : Single shooting  
When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be  
taken.  
o: High-speed continuous shng (Max. 8 shots per sec.)  
i : Low-speed continuouoong (Max. 3 shots per sec.)  
While you hold down thter button completely, shots will be  
taken continuousy.  
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control  
k: 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control  
For self-timer shooting, see the next page. For remote control  
shooting, see page 110.  
  When the battery level is low, the continuous shooting speed will be  
slightly slower.  
  In the AI Servo AF mode, the continuous shooting speed may become  
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.  
  In low-light areas or indoors, the continuous shooting speed may  
become slower even if a fast shutter speed is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
j Using the Self-timer  
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture. The <Q> (10  
sec. timer) can be used in all shooting modes.  
Press the <o> button. (9)  
1
Select the self-timer.  
2
  Look at the LCD panel and turn the  
<5> dial to select the self-timer.  
Q : 10-sec. self-timer  
k: 2-sec. self-timerN  
Take the picture.  
  Look througthe viewfinder, focus  
3
the ect, ten press the shutter  
ttoompletely.  
X can check the self-timer  
ation with the self-timer lamp,  
beeper, and countdown display (in  
seconds) on the LCD panel.  
X Two seconds before the picture is  
taken, the self-timer lamp will stay on  
and the beeper will sound faster.  
  The <k> 2-sec. self-timer enables you to shoot while not touching the  
camera mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you  
shoot still lifes or bulb exposures.  
  After taking self-timer shots, you should check the image for proper focus  
and exposure (p.162).  
  If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter  
button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.108). If stray light enters the  
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.  
  When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.52) for  
an object at about the same distance as where you will be.  
  To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <o> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Advanced Operations  
In the d/s/f/a/F  
shooting des, you can select  
the ter speed, aperture, and  
othemera settings to change  
the exposure and obtain the  
desired result.  
  The M icon on the right of the page title indicates that the  
function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to <d/s/  
f/a/F>.  
  After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the  
LCD panel and viewfinder information will remain displayed  
for about 4 sec. (0).  
  Functions which can be set in the d/s/f/a/F  
shooting modes are listed in “Function Availability Table”  
(p.236).  
Be sure to first set the Quick Control Dial switch to <J>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
d: Program AE  
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit  
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.  
* <d> stands for Program.  
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.  
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.  
1
Focus the subject.  
  Look through the viewfinder and aim  
2
the selected AF point over the  
subject. Then press the shutter button  
halfway.  
X When focus is achieved, the focus  
confirmation light <o> on the  
viewer’s ottom right will light  
ne-hot AF mode).  
X shtter speed and aperture will  
et automatically and displayed in  
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
Check the shutter speed and  
3 aperture display.  
  A correct exposure will be obtained  
as long as the shutter speed and  
aperture display do not blink.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button completely.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
d: Program AE  
  If the “30"” shutter speed and the maximum aperture  
blink, it indicates underexposure.  
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.  
  If the “8000” shutter speed and the minimum aperture  
blink, it indicates overexposure.  
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold  
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the  
lens.  
Differences Between <d> and <1> (Full Auto)  
With <1>, many functions such the AF mode, drive mode, and built-in  
flash are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can  
set are limited. With <d>, only the shutter speed and aperture are set  
automatically. You can freely set the AF mode, drive mode, built-in flash,  
and other functions (p.236).  
About Program Shift  
  In the Program AE mode, can eely change the shutter speed and  
aperture combination (Proset by the camera while maintaining the  
same exposure. Ths is callogram shift.  
  To do this, press the shuter button down halfway, then turn the <6>  
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed.  
  Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken.  
  Program shift cannot be used with flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically  
sets the aperture to obtain the correct exposure suiting the brightness of  
the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can  
freeze the action or moving subject. Or a slower shutter speed can  
create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.  
* <s> stands for Time value.  
Frozen action  
Blurred motion  
(Fast shutter speed)  
(Slw shutter speed)  
Set the ode Dial to <s>.  
1
Set the desired shutter speed.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial.  
2
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
X The aperture is set automatically.  
3
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
  As long as the aperture is not  
blinking, the exposure will be correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
  If the maximum aperture blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until  
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.  
  If the minimum aperture blinks, it indicates  
overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until  
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.  
Shutter Speed Display  
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the  
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec. Also, “0"5”  
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the  
shutter speed automatically to obtain the correct exposure suiting the  
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/  
number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/  
number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus.  
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).  
Sharp foreground and background  
(With a small aperture opening)  
Blured background  
a lare aperture opening)  
SeMode Dial to <f>.  
1
Set the desired aperture.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial.  
2
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
3
X
The shutter speed is set automatically.  
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
  As long as the shutter speed is not  
blinking, the exposure will be correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
  If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (smaller f/  
number) until the blinking stops or set a higher ISO  
speed.  
  If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates  
overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (larger f/  
number) until the blinking stops or set a lower ISO  
speed.  
Aperture Display  
The larger the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The  
apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to  
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aprture.  
Depth of Field PreviewN  
s the depth-of-field preview button  
to stop down the lens to the current  
aperture setting. You can check the  
depth of field (range of acceptable focus)  
through the viewfinder.  
  A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall  
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.  
  The depth-of-field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as  
you change the aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button  
(p.132).  
  The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
a: Manual Exposure  
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To  
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the  
viewfinder or use a commercially-available handheld exposure meter.  
This method is called manual exposure.  
* <a> stands for Manual.  
Set the Mode Dial to <a>.  
1
Set the shutter speed and  
2 aperture.  
  To set the shutter speed, turn the  
<6> dial.  
  To set the aerture, set the Quick  
Control Dial witch to <J>, and turn  
the dial
Fthe subject.  
  s the shutter button halfway.  
X The exposure setting will be  
Standard exposure index  
3
Exposure level mark  
displayed in the viewfinder and on the  
LCD panel.  
  The exposure level mark <s> lets you  
see how far you are from the  
standard exposure level.  
Set the exposure.  
  Check the exposure level and set the  
4
5
desired shutter speed and aperture.  
Take the picture.  
If the [2Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.75) is set to anything other than  
Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.  
[
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
q Selecting the Metering ModeN  
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In  
fully-automatic modes (  
1
/C  
), evaluative metering is set automatically.  
Press the <n> button. (9)  
1
Select the metering mode.  
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> dial.  
2
q Evaluative meterig  
This is a generrpose metering mode suited for  
portraits vebacklit subjects. The camera  
setthe ere automatically to suit the scene.  
w Partial metering  
Effective when the background is much brighter than  
the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial metering  
covers about 9.4% of the viewfinder area at the center.  
r Spot metering  
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or scene.  
The metering is weighted at the center covering about  
2.3% of the viewfinder area. When spot metering is set,  
the spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
e Center-weighted average metering  
The metering is weighted at the center and then  
averaged for the entire scene.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
Setting Exposure CompensationN  
Exposure compensation can increase (brighter) or decrease (darker)  
the standard exposure set by the camera.  
Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-  
stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator on the LCD  
panel and in the viewfinder can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If  
you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops,  
you should follow the instructions for [2Exp. comp./AEB] on the next  
page.  
Set the Mode Dial to <d>, <s>,  
or <f>.  
1
Set the Quick Control Dial switch  
2 to <J>.  
Increased exposure for a brighter image  
Se xposure compensation  
3 amt.  
  After pressing the shutter button  
halfway (0), turn the <5> dial.  
Decreased exposure for a darker image  
Take the picture.  
  To cancel the exposure  
4
compensation, set the exposure  
compensation amount back to <E>.  
If the [2Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.75) is set to anything other than  
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set.  
  The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you  
set the power switch to <2>.  
 
Be careful not to turn the <  
inadvertently. To prevent this, set the Quick Control Dial switch to <  
5
> dial and change the exposure compensation  
>.  
R
  If the amount set exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level  
indicator will display <I> or <J>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N  
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera  
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three  
successive shots. This is called AEB.  
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.  
Select [Expo. comp./AEB].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Expo.  
comp./AEB], then press <0>.  
Set the AEB amount.  
2
 
 
Turn the <  
You can set the exposure compensation  
amount with the < > dial. If AEB is  
6> dial to set the AEB amount.  
5
combined with exposure compensation,  
AEB will e applied centering on the  
exposure compensation amount.  
  P<0> to set it.  
AEB amount  
Whn you exit the menu, <  
h> and the AEB  
vel will be displayed on the LCD panel.  
Take the picture.  
3
 
Focus and press the shutter button  
completely. The three bracketed shots will be  
taken in this sequence: Standard, decreased  
exposure, and increased exposure.  
Canceling AEB  
  Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display.  
  AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch  
to <2> or when the flash is ready to fire.  
  If the drive mode is set to <u>, you must press the shutter button three  
times. When <o> or <i> is set and you hold down the shutter button  
completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously. Then  
the camera will stop shooting. When <Q> or <k> is set, the three  
bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.  
  Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
AAE LockN  
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure  
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure  
setting. Press the <  
A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and  
take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
X The exposure setting will be  
1
displayed.  
Press the <A> button. (0)  
2
X The <A> icon lights in the viewfinder  
to indicate that the exposure setting is  
locked (AE lock).  
  Each time yu press the <A> button,  
it locks the urrent auto exposure  
setti
Recompose and take the picture.  
3
  If you want to maintain the AE lock  
while taking more shots, hold down  
the <A> button and press the shutter  
button to take another shot.  
AE Lock Effects  
Metering  
Mode  
(p.103)  
AF Point Selection Method (p.87)  
Automatic Selection  
Manual Selection  
AE lock is applied at the AF  
point that achieved focus.  
AE lock is applied at the  
selected AF point.  
q*  
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.  
wre  
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the center AF point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
F: Bulb Exposures  
When bulb is set, the shutter stays open while you hold down the  
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter  
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night  
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long  
exposures.  
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.  
1
Set the desired aperture.  
2
  While looking at the LCD panel, turn  
the <6> or <5> dial.  
Take the picture.  
3
  While yohold down the shutter  
bn, thexposure will continue.  
Elapsed exposure time  
X Tlapsed exposure time will be  
ispayed on the LCD panel.  
  Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might  
look a little grainy.  
  When [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [1: Auto] or  
[2: On], noise generated by the bulb exposure can be reduced (p.208).  
  For bulb exposures, using the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote  
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately) is recommended.  
  You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.110) for bulb  
exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the  
bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button  
again to stop the bulb exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
F: Bulb Exposures  
Using the Eyepiece Cover  
If you take a picture without looking at the viewfinder, light entering the  
eyepiece can throw off the exposure. To prevent this, use the eyepiece  
cover (p.23) attached to the camera strap. During Live View shooting  
and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece cover is unnecessary.  
Remove the eyecup.  
1
  While grasping both sides of the  
eyecup, slide it upward to remove.  
Attach the eyepiece cover.  
2
  Slide the eypiece cover down into  
the eyepiecgroove to attach it.  
Connecting the Remote Switch  
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote  
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately) or any EOS accessory  
equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera and shoot with it.  
To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.  
Open the terminal cover.  
1
Connect the plug to the remote  
2 control terminal.  
  Connect the plug as shown in the  
illustration.  
  To disconnect the plug, grasp the  
plug’s silver part and pull out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
Mirror LockupN  
Although using the self-timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera  
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)  
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups.  
When [8C.Fn III -13: Mirror lockup] is set to [1: Enable] (p.215),  
shooting with mirror lockup will be possible.  
1 Focus the subject, press the shutter button completely  
and let go of it.  
X The mirror will swing up.  
2 Press the shutter button completely again.  
X The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.  
  In very bright light such as at the h or ki slope on a sunny day, take  
the picture promptly after mirror lop.  
  Do not point the camera the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and  
damage the shuttecurtain
  If you use bulb expsures, the self-timer, and mirror lockup in  
combination, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer  
delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button  
during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound.  
However, this is not the actual shutter release (no picture is taken).  
  When [1: Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive  
mode is set to continuous.  
  When the self-timer is set to <Q> or <k>, the picture will be taken  
after 10 sec. or 2 sec. respectively.  
  The mirror locks up, and after 30 seconds, it will go back down  
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the  
mirror again.  
  For mirror lockup shots, using the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer  
Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately) is recommended.  
  You can also lockup the mirror and shoot with a remote controller (sold  
separately, p.110). With Remote Controller RC-1, setting it to a 2-sec.  
delay is recommended for shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
R Remote Control Shooting  
With Remote Controller RC-1 or RC-5 (both  
sold separately), you can shoot remotely up  
to about 5 meters/16.4 feet from the  
camera. RC-1 enables you to shoot  
immediately or after a 2-sec. delay, and RC-  
5 has a 2-sec. delay.  
RC-1  
RC-5  
Focus the subject.  
1
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
2 <MF>.  
  You can also shoot with <f>.  
Press the <o> button. (9)  
3
4
Select sel-timer.  
  k athe LCD panel and turn the  
> dial to select <Q> or <k>.  
Press the remote controller’s  
5 transmit button.  
  Point the remote controller toward the  
camera’s remote control sensor and  
press the transmit button.  
X The self-timer lamp lights and the  
picture is taken.  
Remote  
control  
sensor  
Camera misoperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights.  
During wireless remote control, try to keep the camera away from  
fluorescent light sources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
In the d/s/f/a/F shooting  
modes, you can press the <D> button  
to pop-up and fire the built-in flash  
whenever desired. If the built-in flash  
has popped up, you can push it back  
down with your fingers. In the <1> (Full  
Auto) mode, the built-in flash fires  
automatically (p.50). In the <C> mode,  
you can set it to fire automatically or  
manually (p.53).  
Using flash in the  
d
/
s
/
f
/
a
/
F
shooting modes will set the shutter  
speed and aperture as shown below. In any shooting mode, E-TTL II autoflash  
control will take effect to suit the manually- or automatically-set aperture.  
Shooting  
Mode  
Shutter ed  
Aperture  
Automatically  
set  
d
Automatically set 1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.  
Manually set withn 1/250 sec. - 30 sec.  
Automatically  
set  
s
f
Automatically set  
With [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in Av  
mode] (p.207), the following options for  
automatic selection can be selected:  
• 0: Auto*  
Set manually  
• 1: 1/250 - 1/60 sec. auto  
• 2: 1/250 sec. (fixed)  
a
Manually set within 1/250 sec. - 30 sec.  
Set manually  
Set manually  
While you hold down the shutter button, the  
exposure will continue.  
F
* Normally, the sync speed is set automatically within 1/250 sec. to 30 sec. to suit  
the ambient brightness. In low light, the main subject is exposed with the  
automatic flash, and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set  
automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed  
(automatic slow-speed flash sync). With slow shutter speeds, using a tripod is  
recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
Effective Range of Built-in Flash  
Aperture  
[Approx. meters/feet]  
ISO Speed  
800 1600  
100  
200  
400  
3200  
6400 H: 12800  
f/3.5  
f/4  
3.5 / 12 5 / 16 7 / 23 9.5 / 31 14 / 46 19 / 62 27 / 89 39 / 128  
3 / 10 4 / 13 6 / 20 8.5 / 28 12 / 39 17 / 56 24 / 79 34 / 112  
f/5.6  
2 / 7  
3 / 10 4.5 / 15 6 / 20 8.5 / 28 12 / 39 17 / 56 24 / 79  
  For close subjects, the subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away  
when using flash.  
 
Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.  
  If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject, the  
bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash. If you  
use a telephoto lens or a fast lens and the built-in flash is still partially  
obstructed, use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately).  
3 Using Red-eye Reduction  
Using the red-eye reduction lamre taking a flash picture can  
reduce red eye.  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Red-eye  
On/Off], then press <0>. Select  
[On], then press <0>.  
 
For flash photography, when you  
press the shutter button halfway, the  
red-eye reduction lamp will light. Then  
when you press the shutter button  
completely, the picture will be taken.  
 
The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red-  
eye reduction lamp, when the room is well lit, or when you go closer to the subject.  
  When you press the shutter button halfway, the  
display on the viewfinder bottom will gradually turn  
off. For best results, take the picture after this display  
turns off.  
  The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
y Flash Exposure CompensationN  
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, you can set  
exposure compensation for flash. You can set flash exposure  
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.  
Press the <m> button. (9)  
1
Increased exposure  
Set the flash exposure  
2 compensation amount.  
  While looking at the LCD panel or  
viefinde, turn the <5> dial.  
Decreased exposure  
  Tncel the flash exposure  
ompensation, set the flash exposure  
ompensation amount back to <E>.  
 
When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the < > icon will be displayed  
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.  
y
Take the picture.  
3
 
 
If the  
[2Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.75) is set to anything other than  
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker flash exposure has been set.  
If you set flash exposure compensation with both the camera and EX-series  
Speedlite, the Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation setting will override the  
camera’s. If you set flash exposure compensation with an EX-series Speedlite,  
any flash exposure compensation set with the camera will not take effect.  
  The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you  
set the power switch to <2>.  
  The camera can also be used to set the EX-series Speedlite’s flash  
exposure compensation in the same way as with the Speedlite.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
DUsing the Built-in Flash  
B: FE LockN  
FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the correct flash exposure  
reading for any part of a subject.  
Press the <D> button to pop-up  
the built-in flash.  
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
look in the viewfinder to check that  
the <D> icon is lit.  
1
Focus the subject.  
2
3
Press the <B> button. (8)  
 
Aim ewfiner center over the subject  
re ou want to lock the flash  
sure, then press the <  
B> button.  
X The flash will fire a preflash and the  
required flash output is calculated  
and retained in memory.  
X In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed  
for a moment and <d> will light.  
 
Each time you press the <B> button, a  
preflash is fired and the required flash output  
is calculated and retained in memory.  
Take the picture.  
  Compose the shot and press the  
shutter button completely.  
4
X The flash is fired to take the picture.  
If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash, the  
<D> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
3 Setting the FlashN  
The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the  
menu. The [External flash ***] menu options for external Speedlites are  
applicable only to an attached EX-series Speedlite compatible with  
the respective functions.  
The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function.  
Select [Flash control].  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Flash  
control], then press <0>.  
X The flash control screen will appear.  
[Flash firing]  
  Nally, set this to [Enable].  
If sable] is set, both the built-in  
ash and external Speedlite will  
ot fire. This is useful when you only  
want to use the AF-assist beam.  
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]  
The [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]  
menus can set the functions listed on the next page. The functions  
displayed under [External flash func. setting] will vary depending on  
the Speedlite model.  
  Select [Built-in flash func. setting]  
or [External flash func. setting].  
X The flash functions will be displayed.  
The functions not dimmed can be  
selected and set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
3 Setting the FlashN  
[Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting] Settable  
Functions  
[Built-in flash  
func. setting]  
[External flash  
func. setting]  
Function  
Flash mode  
Page  
k
k
116  
117  
Shutter sync.  
FEB*  
k
Flash exposure  
compensation  
k
k
113  
E-TTL II  
117  
Zoom*  
k
Wireless setting  
k
119  
* Regarding the [FEB] (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom], refer to the  
Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
  Flash mode  
You can select the flash moduit your desired flash shooting.  
  TL II] is the standard mode of  
EX-series Speedlites for automatic  
flash shooting.  
  [Manual flash] is for advanced users  
who want to set the [Flash output]  
(1/1 to 1/128) themselves.  
  [MULTI flash] is for advanced users  
who want to set the [Flash output],  
[Frequency], and [Flash count]  
themselves.  
  Regarding other flash modes, refer to  
your Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
3Setting the FlashN  
To prevent the flash from overheating and degrading, avoid firing the MULTI  
flash more than 10 consecutive times. If you fire the flash 10 times, allow the  
flash to rest for at least 10 min. before firing the flash again. Some EX-series  
Speedlites will automatically stop firing after 10 times to protect the flash. If  
this happens, let the flash rest for at least 15 min.  
  Shutter sync.  
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately  
after the exposure starts.  
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the exposure  
ends. When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create  
a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd curtain  
sync, two flashes will be fired, once when you press the shutter  
button completely, and once immediatey before the exposure ends.  
However, with shutter speeds faster tha1/30 sec., the 1st curtain  
sync will automatically take effe
If an external Speedlite is aheyou can also set [Hi-speed]. For  
details, see the Speedlite’uction manual.  
  Flash exposure compensation  
See “y Flash Exposure Compensation” on page 113.  
  E-TTL II  
For normal flash exposures, set it to [Evaluative].  
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire  
metered scene as with an external metering flash. Since flash  
exposure compensation may be necessary depending on the scene,  
this setting is for advanced users.  
  Wireless setting  
See “Using Wireless Flash” on page 119.  
  Clear flash settings  
With the [Built-in flash func. setting] or [External flash func.  
setting] screen displayed, press the <B> button to display the  
screen to clear the flash settings. When you select [OK], the settings  
for the flash will be cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
3Setting the FlashN  
Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions  
Display the Custom Function.  
1
  Select [External flash C.Fn setting],  
then press <0>.  
Set the Custom Function.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
function number, then set the  
function. The procedure is the same  
as setting the camera’s Custom  
Functions (p204).  
  To clall te Custom Function  
settin, select [Clear ext. flash C.Fn  
in step 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Using Wireless FlashN  
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit with Canon  
Speedlites having a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the  
Speedlite to fire. Be sure to read about wireless flash photography in  
the Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
Slave Unit Settings and Position  
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and  
set it as follows. Slave unit control settings other than the below are all  
set with the camera. Different types of slave units can be used and  
controlled together.  
(1) Set the Speedlite as a slave unit.  
(2) Set the Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same one as  
the camera.  
(3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.14), set the slave unit ID.  
(4) Position the camera and slave nit(swithin the range shown  
below.  
(5) Face the slave unit’s wisnsor toward the camera.  
Wireless flash set-up example  
Indoors  
Approx.  
10m  
(32.8ft.)  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
80o  
Approx. 5m Approx. 7m  
(16.4ft.)  
(23.0ft.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite  
This shows the most basic setup  
for fully-automatic wireless flash  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
with one Speedlite.  
Steps 1 to 3 and 6 to 8 apply to  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
all wireless flash shooting.  
Therefore, these steps are  
omitted in the other wireless  
flash setups explained on the  
following pages.  
Indoors  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
80o  
On the menu screens, the <  
and < > icons refer to the external  
Speedlite, and the < > and <  
iconrefer to the built-in flash.  
0>  
1
3
2>  
Press <I> button to pop-up  
thiltin flash.  
  wireless flash, be sure to pop-up  
1
the built-in flash.  
Select [Flash control].  
  Under the [1] tab, select [Flash  
control], then press <0>.  
2
Select [Built-in flash func. setting].  
  Select [Built-in flash func. setting],  
then press <0>.  
3
Select [Flash mode].  
  For [Flash mode], select [E-TTL II],  
then press <0>.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Select [Wireless func.].  
  For [Wireless func.], select [0],  
then press <0>.  
X Under [Wireless func.], [Channel],  
etc., will be displayed.  
5
6
7
Set [Channel].  
  Set the channel (1-4) to the same one  
as the slave unit.  
Fire a test lash.  
  Achecking that the slave unit is  
eay to fire, go to the screen in step  
and press the <A> button.  
X The slave unit will fire. If it does not  
fire, check your settings again  
(p.119).  
Take the picture.  
8
  Set the camera and take the picture  
as you would with normal flash  
shooting.  
  To terminate wireless flash shooting,  
set [Wireless func.] to [Disable].  
  Test flash can also be used to wake up slave units from auto power off.  
  Setting [E-TTL II] to [Evaluative] is recommended.  
  If you use only one external Speedlite, the [Firing group] setting does  
not have any effect.  
  The slave unit is controlled by the built-in flash’s light pulse signal.  
 
Wireless flash will not work if the [Flash mode] is set to [MULTI flash].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite  
and Built-in Flash  
This shows fully-automatic  
wireless flash shooting with  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
one external Speedlite and  
the built-in flash.  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
You can change the flash  
ratio between the external  
Speedlite and built-in flash to  
adjust how the shadows look  
on the subject.  
Indoors  
Outdoors  
80o  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
Select ireless func.].  
1
  llow step 5 on page 121 to select  
3] for [Wireless func.], then  
pss <0>.  
Set the desired flash ratio and  
2 shoot.  
  Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio  
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio  
to the right of 1:1 (up to 1:8) is not  
possible.  
  If the flash output is inadequate, set a  
higher ISO speed (p.62).  
The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop  
increments).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites  
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or  
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.  
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]  
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple  
Speedlites.  
Basic settings:  
Flash mode  
E-TTL II  
: E-TTL II  
: Evaluative  
Wireless func. : 0  
Channel : (Same as slave units)  
[1  
(A+B+C)] Using multiple slSpeedlites as one flash unit  
Convenient when you need a  
large flash output. All the  
Appro
(
slave Speedlites will fire at the  
same output and controlled to  
obtain a standard exposure.  
No matter what the slave ID is  
(A, B, or C), all the slave units  
will fire as one group.  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Indoors  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
80o  
Set [Firing group] to  
[1 (A+B+C)], then shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
Using Wireless FlashN  
[1 (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups  
Divide the slave units into  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
groups A and B, and change  
the flash ratio to obtain the  
desired lighting effect.  
Refer to your Speedlite’s  
instruction manual to set one  
slave unit’s slave ID to A  
(Group A) and the other  
slave unit’s ID to B (Group  
B) and position them as  
shown in the illustration.  
Approx.  
7m  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Indoors  
A
B
(23.0ft.)  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
80o  
Set [Firing goup] to [1 (A:B)].  
1
Set the desired flash ratio and  
2 shoot.  
  Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the  
flash ratio.  
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2-  
stop increments).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
Using Wireless FlashN  
[1 (A:B C)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups  
This is a variant of the [1  
(A:B)] setup on the preceding  
page. This setup has group C  
eliminate the shadows  
created by groups A and B.  
Refer to your Speedlite’s  
instruction manual to set the  
slave ID of the three slave units  
to A (Group A), B (Group B),  
and C (Group C) and position  
them as shown in the  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
C
Approx.  
B
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Indoors  
7m  
A
(23.0ft.)  
Outdoors  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
80o  
illustration.  
Set ing group] to [1 (A:B C)].  
1
Set the desired flash ratio and  
2 shoot.  
  Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the  
flash ratio.  
  Set flash exposure compensation for  
group C as necessary.  
  If [Firing group] is set to [1 (A:B)], group C will not fire.  
  If group C is pointed toward the main subject, overexposure may result.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Fully-automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and  
Multiple External Speedlites  
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained  
on pages 119-125.  
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]  
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple  
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.  
Basic settings:  
1
Flash mode  
E-TTL II  
: E-TTL II  
: Evaluative  
Wireless func. : [0+3]  
Channel  
: (Same as slave units)  
Select ing group].  
  ct he firing group, then set the  
ratio, flash exposure  
2
compensation, and other necessary  
settings before shooting.  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
Approx. 10m  
(32.8ft.)  
C
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx. 7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
Approx.  
7m  
(23.0ft.)  
A
B
A
B
80o  
80o  
80o  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
Approx.  
5m (16.4ft.)  
[1 (A+B+C) 2]  
[1 (A:B) 2]  
[1 (A:B C) 2]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Creative Wireless Flash Shooting  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure compensation  
can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below)  
which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] and  
[Firing group] settings.  
[Flash exp. comp]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to the built-in flash and all  
external Speedlites.  
[2 exp. comp.]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied tthe built-in flash.  
[1 exp. cmp.]  
  Tash exposure compensation is  
ppied to all external Speedlites.  
exp. comp.]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to both groups A and B.  
[Grp.C exp. comp]  
  The flash exposure compensation is  
applied to group C.  
FE lock  
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <B> button to  
set FE lock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
Using Wireless FlashN  
Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash  
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], the flash output can be set  
manually. The flash output settings ([1 flash output], [Group A  
output], etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless  
func.] setting (see below).  
[0]  
  The flash output set manually is  
applied to all external Speedlites.  
[0 (A,B,C)]  
  The flash output can be set manually  
and individually for each group (A, B,  
and C) of external Speedlites.  
[0+3]  
  The flash oput can be set manually  
and iduay for external Speedlite  
fothe built-in flash.  
[0 ,B,C) 3]  
  The flash output can be set manually  
and individually for each group (A, B,  
and C) of external Speedlites and the  
built-in flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
External Speedlites  
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites  
Basically operates like a built-in flash for easy operation.  
When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the  
camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other  
words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the  
built-in flash.  
For detailed instructions, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction  
manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features  
of EX-series Speedlites.  
Shoe-mount Speedlites  
Macro Lites  
  With an EX-series peedlite not compatible with flash function settings  
(p.115), only [Flash exp. comp] and [E-TTL II] can be set for [External  
flash func. setting].  
(Certain EX-series Speedlites also enable [Shutter sync.] to be set.)  
  If the flash metering mode is set to TTL autoflash with the Speedlite’s  
Custom Function, the flash will fire at full output only.  
Canon Speedlites other than the EX-series  
  With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL  
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.  
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or  
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before  
shooting.  
  When using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode, shoot in the  
manual flash mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
External Speedlites  
Using Non-Canon Flash Units  
Sync Speed  
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at 1/  
250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, since the  
flash duration is longer than compact flash units, set the sync speed  
within 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. Be sure to test the flash synchronization  
before shooting.  
PC Terminal  
  The camera’s PC terminal can be  
used with flash units having a sync  
cord. The PC terminal is threaded to  
prevent inadvertent disconnection.  
  The cameras PC terminal has no  
polariYou can connect any sync  
cord ardless of its polarity.  
Cautions for Live View shoo
If you use a non-Canon flah with Live View shooting, set [z Silent  
shoot.] to [Disable] (p.137). The flash will not fire if it is set to [Mode 1]  
or [Mode 2].  
  If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to  
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and  
malfunction may result.  
  Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit requiring 250  
V or more.  
  Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It might  
not fire.  
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to  
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
Live View Shooting  
You can soot while viewing the  
picture on e camera’s LCD  
moThis is called “Live View  
shoo”  
Live View shooting is enabled by  
setting the Live View shooting/  
Movie shooting switch to <A>.  
Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do  
not move.  
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the  
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.  
Using a tripod is recommended.  
About Remote Live View Shooting  
With EOS Utility (provided software) installed in your computer, you  
can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while  
viewing the computer screen. For details, see the Software  
Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
A Live View Shooting  
Set the Live View shooting/Movie  
shooting switch to <A>.  
1
Display the Live View image.  
2
  Press the <0> button.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
the LCD monitor.  
  The image’s field of view is about  
100%.  
Focus the subject.  
  Before shooing, focus with AF or  
manufocu(p.138-145).  
3
  Wheu press the shutter button  
wa, the camera will focus with  
urrent AF mode.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Press the shutter button completely.  
X The picture will be taken and the  
captured image is displayed on the  
LCD monitor.  
X After the image review ends, the  
camera will return to Live View  
shooting automatically.  
  Press the <0> button to end the  
Live View shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
A Live View Shooting  
Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots]  
Shooting Conditions  
Temperature  
No Flash  
50% Flash Use  
At 23°C / 73°F  
At 0°C / 32°F  
230  
220  
220  
210  
  The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6 and CIPA  
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.  
  Continuous Live View shooting is possible for about 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C/73°F  
(with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6).  
  During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The  
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 146-147.  
  You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.  
  When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot  
will be taken.  
  Even while the Live View image is displayed, you can playback images  
by pressing <x>.  
  If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn  
off automatically as set with [5Auto power off] (p.44). If [5Auto  
power off] is set to [Off], the Live View shooting will stop automatically  
after 30 min. (camera power remains on).  
  With the AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you can  
display the Live View image on a TV (p.176-177).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
A Live View Shooting  
About the Information Display  
  Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will  
change.  
AF point (Quick mode)  
Drive mode  
Magnifying frame  
White balance  
Picture Style  
Histogram  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
AEB  
FEB  
Image-recording quality  
Flash-ready  
AE lock  
Exposure  
simulation  
Shutter speed  
Battery check  
Aperture  
Highlight tone priority  
Exposure level indicator/  
AEB range  
ISO speed  
Shots remaining  
AF mode  
d : Live mode  
c : Face detection Live mode  
f: Quick mode  
Flash exposure compensation  
  The histogram can be displayed when [Expo. simulation: Enable] has  
been set (p.136).  
  You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button  
(p.228). Note that if the AF mode is set to [u Live mode] or the camera  
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot  
be displayed.  
  When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image  
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.  
  If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being  
displayed at the suitable brightness due to low or bright light conditions.  
However, the actual movie recorded will reflect the exposure setting.  
  If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be  
grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly  
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Shooting Function Settings  
i/ y / f/ R/ B/ ASettings  
If you press the <m>, <o>,<n>, or <A> button  
during Live View shooting, the setting screen will appear on the LCD  
monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective  
function. The <q> metering mode cannot be set.  
Q Quick Control  
During Live View shooting, you can press the <Q> button to set the  
Auto Lighting Optimizer and image-recording quality. And with f,  
you can select the AF point and set the AF area selection mode.  
Press the <Q> button.  
1
X The settble functions will be  
highlightd in blue.  
  W<f> is selected, the AF  
pots will also be displayed.  
Select a function and set it.  
2
  Use <9> to select a function.  
X The setting of the selected function is  
displayed at the bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
  When the selection of the AF point is  
enabled, the AF area selection mode  
for <f> can be selected with the  
<B> button.  
 
The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting.  
  To check the depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.  
  During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also  
be applied to subsequent shots.  
  You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.110) for Live  
View shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
z Menu Function Settings  
Function settings particular to Live View  
shooting are explained here. The menu  
options under the [z] tab are explained  
below.  
Live View shoot.  
Set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable]. Even if [Disable] is set,  
you can still shoot movies (p.149).  
AF mode  
You can select [Live mode] (p.138), [u Live mode] (p.139), or [Quick  
mode] (p.143).  
Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can display grid lines.  
Expo. simulationN  
Exposure simulation displays and simulates how the brightness of the  
actual image will look. The [Enable] and [Disable] settings are  
explained below:  
  Enable  
The image brightness displayed will be close to the actual brightness  
of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the image  
brightness will change accordingly.  
  Disable  
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live  
View image easy to see.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
z Menu Function Settings  
Silent shootingN  
  Mode 1  
The shooting operation noise is quieter than the normal shooting.  
Continuous shooting is also possible. High-speed continuous  
shooting will be approx. 7.0 fps.  
  Mode 2  
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be  
taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the camera  
operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the shutter  
button’s halfway position, the camera operation will resume. The  
shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if continuous shooting is  
set, only a single shot can be taken in this mode.  
  Disable  
If you use a TS-E lens to make ical hift movements or use an  
Extension Tube, be sure to set thto [Disable]. Setting it to [Mode  
1] or [Mode 2] will result iret or irregular exposures.  
When you press the shutter on completely, the shutter will sound  
like it took two shots. However, only one shot will be taken.  
  If you use flash, the [Disable] operation will take effect even if you had  
set it to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].  
  When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. (If [Mode 1] or  
[Mode 2] is set, the flash will not fire.)  
Metering timerN  
You can change the display time of the exposure setting.  
If you select [y Dust Delete Data], [6Sensor cleaning], [7Clear all  
camera settings], or [7Firmware Ver.], the Live View shooting will be  
terminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Using AF to Focus  
Selecting the AF Mode  
The AF modes available are [Live mode], [u Live mode] (face  
detection, p.139), and [Quick mode] (p.143).  
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.145).  
Select the AF mode.  
  Under the [z] tab, select [AF mode].  
  While the Live View image is  
displayed, you can press the  
<o> button to select the AF  
mode on the setting screen  
displayed.  
Live Mode: d  
The image sensor is used to focthough AF is possible with the  
Live View image displayedthe Aeration will take longer than  
with the Quick mode. Als, achieving focus may be more difficult than  
with the Quick mode.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <0> button.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
the LCD monitor.  
1
X The AF point < > will appear.  
Move the AF point.  
2
  You can use <9> to move the AF  
AF point  
point to where you want to focus (it  
cannot go to the edges of the picture).  
  If you press <9> straight down, the  
AF point will return to the image  
center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Aim the AF points over the subjects  
and press the shutter button halfway.  
X When focus is achieved, the AF point  
will turn green and the beeper will  
sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn red.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.132).  
u (Face detection) Live e: c  
With the same AF methd as the Live mode, human faces are detected  
and focused. Have the target person face the camera.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press the <0> button.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
the LCD monitor.  
1
  When a face is detected, the <p>  
frame will appear over the face to be  
focused.  
  If multiple faces are detected, <q>  
will be displayed. Use <9> to move  
the <q> frame over the target face.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
2
3
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
the camera will focus the face  
covered by the <p> frame.  
X
When focus is achieved, the AF point will  
turn green and the beeper will sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn red.  
  If a face cannot be detected, the AF  
point < > will be displayed and the  
center AF point will be used for  
focusing.  
Take the picture.  
  Check the fcus and exposure, then  
presshuer button completely to  
thpicture (p.132).  
  If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens  
enables manual focusing even while the lens focus switch is set to  
<f>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be  
detected and <p> will be displayed.  
  An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.  
 
Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture,  
too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially hidden.  
  The <p> focusing frame might cover only part of the face.  
 
When you press <  
(p.138). You can tilt <  
down again, it will switch back to  
9
9
> straight down, it will switch to the Live mode  
> to move the AF point. If you press < > straight  
(face detection) Live mode.  
9
u
  Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the  
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button  
halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Using AF to Focus  
Live Mode and  
AF operation  
u
(Face Detection) Live Mode Notes  
  Focusing will take slightly longer.  
  Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button  
halfway will focus again.  
  The image brightness may change during and after the AF  
operation.  
  If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,  
the screen might flicker and focusing can be difficult. If this happens,  
stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light  
source first.  
  If you press the <u> button in the Live mode, the AF point area will  
be magnified. If it is difficult to focus in the magnified view, return to  
the normal view and autofocus. Note tht the AF speed may differ  
between the normal and magnifiview.  
  If you autofocus in the Live modnormal view and then magnify  
the image, the focus mighff.  
  In the u Live modepresse <u> button will not magnify the  
image.  
  In the Live mode or u (face detection) Live mode, if you shoot a  
peripheral subject and the target subject is slightly out of focus, aim the  
center AF point over the subject to focus, then take the picture.  
  The AF-assist beam will not be emitted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
Using AF to Focus  
Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult:  
  Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat  
surfaces.  
  Subjects in low light.  
  Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the  
horizontal direction.  
  Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps  
changing.  
  Night scenes or points of light.  
  Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers.  
  Extremely small subjects.  
  Subjects at the edge of the picture.  
  Subjects strongly reflecting light.  
  The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an  
animal in a cage).  
  Subjects which keep moving within AF point and cannot keep  
still due to camera shake or sct ur.  
  A subject approaching or moway from the camera.  
  Autofocusing while the ubject is way out of focus.  
  Soft focus effect is applied wth a soft focus lens.  
  A special effects filter is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
Using AF to Focus  
Quick Mode: f  
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in the One-Shot AF mode  
(p.85), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.  
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image  
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.  
AF point  
Display the Live View image.  
1
  Press the <0> button.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
the LCD monitor.  
  The small boxes on the screen are  
the AF points, and the larger box is  
the magnifying frame.  
Magnifying frame  
elethe AF point.  
2
hen you press the <Q> button, the  
Quick Control screen will appear.  
X The settable functions will be  
highlighted in blue.  
  Use <9> to make the AF point  
selectable.  
  Press the <B> button to change  
the AF area selection mode.  
  Turn the <6> and <5> dial to  
select the AF point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
3
  Aim the AF points over the subjects  
and press the shutter button halfway.  
X The Live View image will turn off, the  
reflex mirror will go back down, and  
AF will be executed.  
X When focus is achieved, the beeper  
will sound and the Live View image  
will reappear.  
X The AF point used to focus will be  
displayed in red.  
Take the picture.  
4
  Chee fous and exposure, then  
ss e shutter button completely to  
the picture (p.132).  
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture only while  
the Live View image is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
Focusing ManuallyN  
You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually.  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
  Turn the lens focusing ring to focus  
1
roughly.  
Move the magnifying frame.  
2
  Use <9> to move the magnifying  
frame to the position where you want  
to focus.  
  If you press <9> straight down, the  
AF point will return to the image  
center.  
Magnifying frame  
May thimage.  
3
Prs the <u> button.  
he image within the magnifying  
frame will be magnified.  
  Each time you press the <u> button,  
the display format will change as  
follows:  
5x  
10x  
Normal view  
Focus manually.  
4
5
  While looking at the magnified image,  
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.  
  After achieving focus, press the <u>  
button to return to the normal view.  
AE lock  
Magnified area position  
Magnification  
Take the picture.  
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button to take the  
picture (p.132).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Notes About the Live View Image  
  Under low or bright light conditions, the Live View image might not reflect  
the brightness of the captured image.  
  If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If  
this happens, stop and resume the Live View shooting under the actual  
light source to be used.  
  If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live  
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness  
level stabilizes before shooting.  
  If there is a very bright light source in the picture, such as the sun, the  
bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual  
captured image will correctly show the bright area.  
  In low light, if you set the [6LCD brightness] to a bright setting,  
chrominance noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the  
chrominance noise will not be recorded in the captured image.  
  When you magnify the image, the image shapness may look more  
pronounced than it really is.  
About the <E> icon  
  If Live View shooting is used irect sunlight or in other hot  
environments, the <Eicon (wng for the camera’s high internal  
temperature) may apper on he screen. If Live View shooting continues  
with a high internal temperature, it may degrade image quality. You  
should therefore stop Live View shooting if the warning icon appears.  
  If Live View shooting continues while the <E> warning icon is displayed  
and the camera’s internal temperature increases, the Live View shooting  
will stop automatically. Live View shooting will be disabled until the  
camera’s internal temperature decreases.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
Notes About the Shooting Results  
  When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long  
period, the camera’s internal temperature may increase and it can  
degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting  
images.  
  Before taking a long exposure, stop Live View shooting temporarily and  
wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image  
degradation.  
  Live View shooting in high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may  
cause noise or irregular colors.  
  When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (horizontal banding, dots of  
light, etc.) may appear.  
  If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not  
come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.  
During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be  
displayed in red. Even if you take the ictre during magnified view, the  
image will be captured in the norview.  
Custom Function Notes  
  During Live View shootingn Custom Function settings will be  
disabled (p.205).  
  If the [2Auto Lighing ptimizer] (p.75) menu is set to anything other  
than [Disable], the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure  
compensation or flash exposure compensation has been set.  
Notes About Lenses and Flash  
  The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used.  
  FE lock is not possible when the built-in flash or an external Speedlite is  
used. Modeling flash and test flash will not fire (except for wireless flash  
shooting) if an external Speedlite is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting Movies  
Movie shting s enabled by  
setting thive View shooting/  
Mohooting switch to <k>.  
The ie file format will be  
MOV.  
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card  
having a read/write speed of at least 8 MB/sec.  
If you use a slow card when shooting movies, the movie might not  
be recorded properly. Also, if you playback movies on a card  
having a slow read/write speed, movie might not playback properly.  
To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card  
manufacturer’s Web site.  
About Full HD 1080  
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-  
Definition with 1080 vertical pixels (scanning lines).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
k Shooting Movies  
Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback  
movies (p.176-177).  
Shooting with Autoexposure  
When the shooting mode is set to a shooting mode other than <a>,  
autoexposure control will take effect to fit the scene current brightness.  
Autoexposure control will be the same for all shooting modes.  
Set the Live View shooting/Movie  
shooting switch to <k>.  
X The reflex mirror will make a sound,  
then the image will appear on the  
LCD monitor.  
1
Focus the subject.  
2
  Before shoong a movie, autofocus  
or mal focus (p.138-145).  
  n ou press the shutter button  
ay, the camera will focus with  
the current AF mode.  
Shoot the movie.  
3
  Press the <0> button to start  
shooting the movie. To stop shooting  
the movie, press the <0> button  
again.  
X While the movie is being shot, the  
o” mark will be displayed on the  
upper right of the screen.  
  During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s  
heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 158-159.  
  If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages  
146 and 147.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
k Shooting Movies  
  You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.  
  One continuous movie will be recorded as one file.  
  During movie shooting, the top, bottom, left, and right parts of the screen  
will have a semi-transparent mask. The area enclosed by the semi-  
transparent mask will be the movie image that is recorded. The semi-  
transparent mask size will change depending on the [Movie rec. size]  
setting (p.156).  
  AE lock is possible by pressing the <A> button (p.106).  
  In all shooting modes except <a>, the ISO speed (100-6400 or  
expanded to 12800), shutter speed, and aperture will be set  
automatically.  
  Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed and  
aperture (p.152) on the screen’s bottom left. This is the exposure setting  
for taking a still photo (except for <a>).  
  The sound is recorded in monaural by the camera’s built-in microphone  
(p.16).  
  Stereo sound recording is possiby conecting an external  
microphone equipped with a sterini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the  
camera’s external micropN tminal (p.16).  
  The sound recording level adjusted automatically.  
  You can use Remoe Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately, p.110) to  
start and stop the movie hooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>.  
With RC-1, set the timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the  
transmit button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still  
photo shooting will take effect.  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the total shooting time will be  
as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 1 hr. 20 min., At 0°C/32°F: Approx. 1  
hr. 10 min.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
k Shooting Movies  
About the Information Display  
  Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will  
change.  
Movie shooting remaining  
Frame rate  
time/Elapsed time  
Recording movie  
White balance  
Picture Style  
Magnifying frame  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
AF point  
(Quick mode)  
Image-recording quality  
Movie-recording size  
AE lock  
Exposure  
simulation  
Shutter speed  
Battery check  
Aperture  
ISO speed  
Shots remaining  
AF mode  
Drive mode  
Exposure compensation amount  
d : Live mode  
c : Face detection Live  
mode  
f: Quick mode  
  You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button  
(p.228). When you start shooting a movie, the electronic level will turn  
off. To display the electronic level again, stop the movie shooting and  
press the <B> button. Note that if the AF mode is set to [u Live  
mode] or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable  
(p.177), the electronic level cannot be displayed.  
  If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaining time will  
be displayed in red.  
  When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will  
change to the elapsed time.  
  When <  
> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image  
brightness is close to what the actual movie will look like.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
k Shooting Movies  
Using Manual Exposure  
When the shooting mode is <a> (p.102), you can  
manually set the shutter speeds, aperture, and ISO  
speeds shown below and shoot a movie. Using manual  
exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.  
Shutter speed : Turn the <6> dial. The settable shutter speeds  
depend on the frame rate <9>.  
7 / 8  
: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.  
4 / 5 / 6 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.  
Aperture  
: Set the Quick Control Dial switch to <J>, and turn the  
<5> dial.  
ISO speed  
: Press the <m> button, then turn the <6> dial.  
• Manual setting range100 - 6400  
• Auto ISO range  
100 - 6400  
  AE lock and exposure comtiocannot be set.  
  If <Q> is set and the ISeed or aperture changes during movie  
shooting, the white alane may also change.  
  If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting, the movie image might  
flicker.  
  With the ISO speed set to Auto, you can shoot a movie as if it were in  
aperture-priority AE mode (fixed aperture, standard exposure).  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], the  
settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - 6400.  
  When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.  
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less  
smooth the subject’s movement will look.  
  Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since  
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be  
recorded.  
  If you playback the movie with “Shooting information display” (p.163), the  
shooting mode, shutter speed, and aperture will not be displayed. The  
image information (Exif) will record the settings used at the start of the  
movie.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
k Shooting Movies  
Shooting Still Photos  
You can take a still photo at anytime by  
pressing the shutter button completely,  
even during movie shooting.  
Taking still photos during movie shooting  
  The still photo will record the entire screen including the semi-  
transparent mask.  
  If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will have a  
still moment lasting about 1 sec.  
  The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie  
shooting will resume automatically when tLive View image is  
displayed.  
  The card will record the movid sl photo as separate files.  
  Functions particular to still share shown below. Other  
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.  
Function  
Image-recording quality As set in the [1Quality] menu.  
Shutter speed and aperture set automatically  
Setting  
(Manually if shooting mode is <a>).  
Displayed when the shutter button is pressed  
halfway.  
Exposure setting  
AEB  
Canceled  
Drive mode  
Flash  
Modes other than self-timer available.  
Flash off  
  For shooting still photos during movie shooting, using a UDMA (Ultra  
DMA) card having a writing speed faster than 8 MB/sec. is  
recommended.  
  If the shooting mode is <a>, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO  
speed set for movie shooting will be used as is.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Shooting Function Settings  
f/ R/ B/ A/ iSettings  
If you press the <o>, <n>, or <A> button while the  
image is displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will appear  
on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the  
respective function. Note that the <q> metering mode cannot be set.  
If the shooting mode is <a>, you can press the <m> button and  
turn the <6> dial to set the ISO speed.  
Q Quick Control  
With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q>  
button to set the Auto Lighting Optimizer, image-recording quality for  
still photos, and movie recording size. And with f, you can select the  
AF point and set the AF area selection moe.  
Prehe <Q> button.  
1
Thsettable functions will be  
ghlighted in blue.  
  When <f> is selected, the AF  
points will also be displayed.  
Select a function and set it.  
2
  Use <9> to select a function.  
X The setting of the selected function is  
displayed at the screen bottom.  
  Turn the <5> or <6> dial to  
change the setting.  
  When the selection of the AF point is  
enabled, the AF area selection mode  
for <f> can be selected with the  
<B> button.  
  Exposure compensation can be set (except in <a> mode).  
  The Picture Style, white balance, image-recording quality, and exposure  
compensation (except in <a> mode) set for movie shooting will also be  
applied to still photos.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
x Menu Function Settings  
Function settings particular to movie  
shooting are explained here. When the  
Live View shooting/Movie shooting  
switch is set to <k>, the menu will  
show the [x] tab. The menu options  
are as follows.  
AF mode  
The AF mode will be the same as described on pages 138-144. You can  
select [Live mode], [u Live mode], or [Quick mode]. Note that  
continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible.  
Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], ycadisplay grid lines.  
Movie-recording size  
[1920x1080] : Full HD (Full High-Definition) recording quality.  
[1280x720] : HD (High-Definition) recording quality.  
[640x480]  
: Standard recording quality. The screen format will be 4:3.  
The [9] (frame rate) indicates how many frames are recorded per  
second. This will change depending on the [6Video system] menu  
setting (NTSC for North America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc., or PAL for  
Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). Note that [4] is used for motion  
pictures.  
* The actual frame rate will be: 6: 29.97, 5: 25.00, 4: 23.976, 8: 59.94, 7:  
50.00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
x Menu Function Settings  
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute  
Total Recording Time  
Movie-recording  
Size  
File Size  
4GB Card  
16GB Card  
6
[1920x1080]  
5
4
8
7
8
7
12 min.  
49 min.  
330 MB/min.  
[1280x720]  
[640x480]  
12 min.  
24 min.  
49 min.  
330 MB/min.  
165 MB/min.  
1 hr. 39 min.  
  After you start shooting a movie, the movie shooting will stop  
automatically if the file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie time reaches 29  
min. 59 sec. To shoot a movie again, pres the <0> button. (A new  
movie file starts being recorded.)  
  The semi-transparent mask on thp and bottom and on the left and  
right will not be recorded.  
  With ZoomBrowser EX/Imwser (provided software), you can  
extract a still image from the movie. The still image quality will be as  
follows: Approx. 2 megaxels at [1920x1080], approx. 1 megapixel at  
[1280x720], and approx. 300,000 pixels at [640x480].  
Sound recording  
When the sound recording is set to [On], monaural sound will be  
recorded with the built-in microphone. Stereo sound recording is  
possible by connecting an external microphone equipped with a stereo  
mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal  
(p.16). The sound recording level will be adjusted automatically.  
Silent shootingN  
This function applies when shooting still photos (p.137).  
Metering timerN  
You can change how long the AE lock is to be maintained with the <  
A> button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
Notes on Movie Shooting  
Recording and Image Quality  
  If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will  
operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway.  
The Image Stabilizer may cause the total movie shooting time or the  
number of possible shots to decrease. If you use a tripod or if the Image  
Stabilizer is not necessary, you should set the IS switch to <2>.  
  The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation  
noise. If you use a commercially-available external microphone, you can  
prevent (or reduce) these noises from being recorded.  
  Do not connect the external microphone IN terminal to anything other  
than an external microphone.  
  Autofocusing during movie shooting is not recommended since it might  
momentarily throw the focus way off or change the exposure. Even if the  
AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it wl switch to the Live mode  
during movie shooting.  
  If movie shooting is not possible due e insfficient remaining  
capacity of the card, the moviotiremaining time (p.152) will be  
displayed in red.  
  If you use a card havina slow ng speed, a five-level  
indicator might appear n the right of the screen during  
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been  
written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer  
memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will  
climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting  
Indicator  
will stop automatically.  
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either  
not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward.  
First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.  
If you take still photos during the movie shooting, the movie shooting  
might stop. If the still image recording quality has been set low, the movie  
shooting might continue instead.  
  When movie shooting is set, certain Custom Function settings will be  
disabled (p.205).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
Notes on Movie Shooting  
Camera’s internal temperature increase and image degradation  
  If you continue to shoot movies for a prolonged period, the camera’s  
internal temperature will increase. This can degrade the image quality.  
While not shooting, turn off the power.  
  If you shoot under direct sunlight or high-temperature conditions, the  
<E> icon (high internal temperature warning) may appear on the  
screen. If you keep shooting a movie with the warning icon displayed, the  
image quality might degrade. You should turn off the power and allow the  
camera to rest for a while.  
  If the <E> icon is displayed and you keep shooting movies until the  
camera’s internal temperature increases further, the movie shooting will  
stop automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again  
until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power  
and let the camera rest for a while.  
Playback and TV connection  
  If the brightness changes during e shoting, that part might freeze  
momentarily.  
  If the camera is connected V set with an HDMI cable (p.177),  
pressing the <Bbutton during movie shooting will not display the  
INFO screen.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.176-177) and shoot a movie,  
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the  
sound will be properly recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Playback  
This chapter explains how to plaback and erase  
photos and movies, how to dispimages on a TV  
screen, and other playbacated functions.  
About images taken with another camera:  
The camera might not be able to properly display images captured  
with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name  
was changed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
xImage Playback  
Single Image Display  
1
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The last captured image or last image  
viewed will appear.  
Select the image.  
2
 
To playback images starting with the last  
image, turn the < > dial counterclockwise.  
5
To playback images starting with the first  
captured image, turn the dial clockwise.  
  Press the <B> button to change  
the display frmat.  
Single image display +  
Image-recording quality  
Single image display  
Shooting information display  
Histogram display  
Exit the image playback.  
3
  Press the <x> button to exit the  
image playback and return the  
camera to shooting ready.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
xImage Playback  
B Shooting Information Display  
AF Microadjustment  
Protect  
Exposure compensation amount  
Folder number - File number  
Card  
Flash exposure  
compensation amount  
Aperture  
Histogram  
Shutter speed/  
Recording time  
(Brightness/RGB)  
Picture Style and  
settings  
Metering mode  
Shooting mode/  
Movie  
ISO speed  
Highlight tone priority  
Color temperature  
when <P> is set  
Color space  
Shooting date and time  
Image-recording  
quality/Movie-  
recording size  
Image verification data  
appended  
Playback number/  
Total images recorded  
ile size  
White balance correction  
White balance  
* When you shoot in the RAW+JPEG mode, the JPEG image file size will be  
displayed.  
* In the case of movies, the movie icon <k>, file type [MOV], and recording size  
([1920], [1280], [640]) will be displayed. The shutter speed and certain other  
shooting information will not be displayed.  
  About the Highlight Alert  
When the [4Highlight alert] menu option is set to [Enable],  
overexposed highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in  
the overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a  
negative amount and shoot again.  
  About the AF Point Display  
When the [4  
AF point disp.] menu option is set to [Enable], the AF  
point which achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF  
point selection was used, multiple AF points might be displayed in red.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
xImage Playback  
  About the Histogram  
The brightness histogram display shows the exposure level  
distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram display is for  
checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be  
switched with the [4Histogram] menu option.  
[Brightness] Display  
Sample Histograms  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of  
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis  
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left  
and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis  
indicates how many pixels exist for each  
brightness level. The more pixels there are  
toward the left, the darker the image. And the  
more pixels there are toward the right, the  
brighter the image. If there are too y piels  
on the left, the shadow detail will be t. And if  
there are too many pixels on htthe  
highlight detail will be lst. The dation in-  
Dark image  
Normal brightness  
Bright image  
between will be reprodued. By checking the image and its  
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and  
the overall gradation  
[RGB] Display  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary  
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).  
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on  
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how  
many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels  
there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. And  
the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the  
color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color  
information will be lacking. And if there are too many pixels on the  
right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By checking the  
image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and  
gradation condition and white balance inclination.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
H
Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display)  
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine  
images on one screen.  
Turn on the index display.  
1
  During image playback, press the  
<I> button.  
X The 4-image index display will  
appear. The currently-selected image  
will be highlighted in a blue frame.  
  Press the <I> button again to  
switch to the 9-image index display.  
Pressing the <u> button will toggle  
the disply from 9 images, 4 images,  
anone mage displayed.  
Î
Î
Select the image.  
  Turn the <5> dial to move the blue  
frame to select the image.  
2
  Press <0> and the selected image  
will be displayed as a single image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
IJump through Images (Jump display)  
With the single image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump  
through the images.  
Select the jump method.  
1
  In the [4Image jump w/6] menu,  
select the desired jump method from  
[1 image/10 images/100 images/  
Date/Folder/Movies/Stills], then  
press <0>.  
Bse by jumping.  
2
  s the <x> button to playback  
the image.  
  Turn the <6> dial.  
X The jump display will proceed  
according to the selected jump  
method.  
X On the bottom right, the jump method  
and current image location are  
indicated.  
Jump method  
Image location  
  To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date]. Turn the  
<6> dial to display the shooting date.  
  To search images according to folder, select [Folder].  
  If the card has both [Movies] and [Stills], select either one to display  
only movies or stills.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
u/y Magnified View  
You can magnify the image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.  
Magnify the image.  
  During image playback, press the  
1
<u> button.  
X The image will be magnified.  
  To increase the magnification, hold  
down the <u> button. The image will  
continue to be magnified until it  
reaches the maximum magnification.  
  Press the <I> button to reduce  
the magnification. If you hold down  
the button, the magnification will  
continue to reduce to the single  
image diplay.  
Magnified area position  
rolaround the image.  
2
se <9> to scroll around the  
magnified image.  
  To exit the magnified display, press  
the <x> button and the single-  
image display will return.  
  You can turn the <6> dial to view another image while the  
magnification is maintained.  
  Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after  
the image is taken.  
  A movie cannot be magnified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
bRotating the Image  
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.  
Select [Rotate].  
  Under the [3] tab, select [Rotate],  
1
then press <0>.  
Select the image.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be rotated.  
  You can also select an image on the  
index display.  
Rte e image.  
3
  time you press <0>, the  
image will rotate clockwise as follows:  
90° 270° 0°  
  To rotate another image, repeat steps  
2 and 3.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
  If you have set [5Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.182) before taking  
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.  
  If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during  
image playback, set the [5Auto rotate] menu option to [OnzD].  
  A movie cannot be rotated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
k Enjoying Movies  
Basically, there are the following three ways to playback the movies you  
shot.  
Playback on a TV set  
(p.176, 177)  
Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI  
Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to  
connect the camera to a TV set. Then  
you can playback the captured movies  
and photos on the TV.  
If you have a High-Definition TV set and  
connect your camera to it with an HDMI  
cable, you can watch Full HD (Full High-  
Definition 1920x1080) and HD (High-  
Definition 180x720) movies with higher  
image quali.  
  Movies on a card can be pled oby devices compatible with MOV  
files.  
  Since hard disk recorders dhave an HDMI IN terminal, the camera  
cannot be connectewith an HDMI cable.  
  Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB  
cable, movies and photos cannot be played nor saved.  
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor  
(p.171-175)  
You can playback the movie on the  
camera’s LCD monitor and even edit out  
the first and last scenes. You can also  
playback the photos and movies  
recorded in the card as an automatic  
slide show.  
A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and  
played back with the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
k Enjoying Movies  
Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer  
(See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser)  
The movie files recorded in the card can  
be transferred to a personal computer  
and played or edited with ZoomBrowser  
EX/ImageBrowser (provided software).  
You can also extract a single frame from  
a movie and save it as a still photo.  
  To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer, the  
personal computer must be a high-performance model. Regarding the  
hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EXmageBrowser, see the  
PDF file instruction manual.  
  If you want to use commercially-availsoftwre to playback or edit the  
movies, be sure it is compatibh MOV files. For details on  
commercially-available softwauire the software maker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
k Playing Movies  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button to display the  
1
image.  
Select a movie.  
2
 
Turn the <5> dial to select the image.  
  During the single-image display, the  
<1s> icon displayed on the  
upper left indicates that it is a movie.  
 
During the index display, the perforation  
on the left edge of the image indicates that  
it is a move. Movies cannot be played  
on the inex display, so press <  
0> to  
sh to te single-image display.  
thsingle-image display,  
3 s <0>.  
X The movie playback panel will appear  
on the bottom.  
Playback the movie.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [7]  
(play), then press <0>.  
4
X The movie will start playing.  
  You can pause the movie playback by  
pressing <0>.  
  During movie playback, you can  
adjust the sound volume by turning  
the <6> dial.  
Speaker  
  For more details on the playback  
procedure, see the next page.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
k Playing Movies  
Function  
Exit  
Playback Description  
Returns to the single-image display.  
7 Play  
Pressing <0> toggles between play and pause.  
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial. The  
slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right.  
8 Slow motion  
5 First frame  
Displays the movie’s first frame.  
Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is  
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.  
3 Previous frame  
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-  
frame. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the  
movie.  
6 Next frame  
4 Last frame  
X Edit  
Displays the movie’s last scene.  
Displays the editing screen (p.173).  
Playback position  
mm’ ss”  
Playback time  
You can adjust the buspeaker’s (p.17) sound volume  
by turning the dil.  
9 Volume  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6, the continuous playback time  
at 23°C/73°F will be as follows: Approx. 3 hr.  
  During the single-image display, press the <B> button to switch the  
shooting information display (p.228).  
  If you took a still photo when you shot the movie, the still photo will be  
displayed for about 1 sec. during the movie playback.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.176-177) to playback a movie,  
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not  
adjust the sound volume.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
X
Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes  
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments.  
On the movie playback screen,  
select [X].  
X The editing screen will be displayed.  
1
Specify the parts to be edited out.  
2
  Select either [ ] (Cut beginning) or  
[
] (Cut end), then press <0>.  
  Tilt <9> to the left or right to fast  
forward or turn the <5> dial (Next  
frame) to specify the part to be edited  
out, then press <0>.  
  The portion highlighted in blue on the  
top of thscreen is what will remain.  
ck the editing.  
3
 
Select [7] and press <0> to playback  
the portion highlighted in blue.  
 
To change the editing, go back to step 2.  
  To cancel the editing, select [ ] and  
press <0>.  
Save the movie.  
  Select [ ], then press <0>.  
X The save screen will appear.  
4
 
To save it as a new movie, select [New file].  
Or to save it and overwrite the original movie  
file, select [Overwrite]. Then press <  
0>.  
  If the card does not have enough space to save the movie, only  
[Overwrite] can be selected.  
  More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX/  
ImageBrowser (provided software).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show.  
Select [Slide show].  
1
  Under the [4] tab, select [Slide  
show], then press <0>.  
Select the images to be played  
Number of images to be played  
2 back.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item,  
then press <0>.  
[All images/Movies/Stills]  
  Turn the <5> dial to select one of  
the following: [jAll images/  
kMovies/zStills]. Then press  
<0
[Fer/ate]  
  the <5> dial to select either  
[nFolder] or [iDate].  
  When <z > is displayed  
brightly, press the <B> button.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the folder  
or date, then press <0>.  
Item  
Playback Description  
jAll images All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back.  
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played  
back.  
nFolder  
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will  
be played back.  
iDate  
kMovies  
zStills  
Only the movies in the card will be played back.  
Only the still photos in the card will be played back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
Set the play time and repeat  
3 option.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Set up],  
then press <0>.  
  For still photos, set the [Play time]  
and [Repeat] options, then press the  
<M> button.  
[Play time]  
[Repeat]  
Start the side show.  
  Tthe 5> dial to select [Start],  
thpress <0>.  
4
fte[Loading image...] is displayed for  
few seconds, the slide show will start.  
Quit the slide show.  
5
 
To quit the slide show and return to the  
setting screen, press the < > button.  
M
  To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be  
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume  
the slide show.  
  During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the  
still photo display format.  
  During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the  
<6>.  
 
During pause, you can turn the <5> or <6> dial to view another image.  
  During the slide show, auto power off will not work.  
  The display time may vary depending on the image.  
  To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 176-177.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
Viewing the Images on TV  
You can also view the still photos and movies on a TV set. Before  
connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and  
television, turn off the camera and television.  
* Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set.  
* Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off.  
Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
Connect the provided AV cable to  
the camera.  
  Connect the AV cable to the camera’s  
<q/C> terminal.  
1
  With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing  
the back of the camera, insert it into  
the <q/C> terminal.  
Connect the V cable to the TV set.  
(Red)  
2
  Connthe AV cable to the TV’s  
o IN terminal and to the audio IN  
nal.  
(White)  
(Yellow)  
Turn on the TV and switch the TV’s  
3 video input to select the connected port.  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear on the TV  
5
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor.)  
  To playback movies, see page 171.  
 
If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not be  
displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with [ Video system].  
6
  Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images might not  
be displayed if you use a different cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
Viewing the Images on TV  
Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
The HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.  
Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.  
1
  Connect the HDMI cable to the  
camera’s <D> terminal.  
  With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo  
facing the front of the camera, insert it  
into the <D> terminal.  
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV  
2 set.  
  Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s  
HDMI IN port.  
Turn the V and switch the TV’s  
3 ideo put to select the connected port.  
the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear on the TV  
5
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor.)  
 
The images will be displayed at the  
TV’s optimum resolution automatically.  
  By pressing the <B> button, you  
can change the display format.  
  To playback movies, see page 171.  
  Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>  
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
  Some TVs might not be able to display the captured images. In such a  
case, use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV.  
  The camera’s <q/C> terminal and <D>  
terminal cannot be used at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
K Protecting Images  
Protecting the image prevents it from being erased accidentally.  
Select [Protect images].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Protect  
images], then press <0>.  
X The protect setting screen will  
appear.  
Image protect icon  
Select the image and protect it.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
2
image to be protected, then press  
<0>.  
X When an image is protected, the  
<K> icon wll appear on the screen.  
  To cel the image protection, press  
0> gain. The <K> icon will  
ppar.  
  rotect another image, repeat step  
2.  
  To exit the image protection, press  
the <M> button. The menu will  
reappear.  
If you format the card (p.43), the protected images will also be erased.  
 
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase  
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.  
  If you erase all the images (p.180), only the protected images will  
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images  
all at once.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
LErasing Images  
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in  
one batch. Protected images (p.178) will not be erased.  
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure  
you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent  
important images from being erased accidentally, protect it.  
Erasing a RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and  
JPEG images.  
Erasing a Single Image  
Playback the image to be erased.  
1
Press the <L> button.  
2
X The erase menu will appear at the  
bottom othe screen.  
Erahe image.  
urthe <5> dial to select [Erase],  
3
en press <0>. The image  
displayed will be erased.  
3Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch  
By checkmarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple  
images at one time.  
Select [Erase images].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Erase  
images], then press <0>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
LErasing Images  
Select [Select and erase images].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Select  
and erase images], then press  
<0>.  
X The image will be displayed.  
  To display the three-image view,  
press the <I> button. To return  
to the single-image display, press the  
<u> button.  
Select the images to be erased.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be erased, then press  
<0>.  
X The <X> icn will be displayed on  
the ur lef
  o erother images, repeat step 3.  
Ehe image.  
  Press the <L> button.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
4
X The selected images will be erased.  
3Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card  
You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time. When the  
[3Erase images] menu is set to [All images in folder] or [All images  
on card], all the images in the folder or card will be erased.  
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.43).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  
The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum  
viewing. You can set the automatic adjustment’s brightness level  
(brighter or darker) or adjust the brightness manually.  
Select [LCD brightness].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [LCD  
brightness], then press <0>.  
Select [Auto] or [Manual].  
2
  Turn the <6> dial to make the  
selection.  
Adjust thbrightness.  
3
  Wrefering to the gray chart, turn  
th<5> dial, then press <0>.  
ou can adjust [Auto] to one of three  
evels, and [Manual] to one of seven  
levels.  
Automatic adjustment  
Manual adjustment  
  While [Auto] is set, be careful not to obstruct the round, external light  
sensor on the right of the LCD monitor with your finger, etc.  
  To check the image’s exposure, you should look at the histogram  
(p.164).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Auto Rotation of Vertical Images  
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they  
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD  
monitor and computer instead of horizontally. The  
setting of this feature can be changed.  
Select [Auto rotate].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
rotate], then press <0>.  
Set the auto rotate.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
  OnzD  
The vertical image is automarotated on both the camera’s  
LCD monitor and on thpersoncomputer.  
  OnD  
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the personal  
computer.  
  Off  
The vertical image is not rotated.  
Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while Auto rotate was  
set to [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for  
playback.  
  Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be  
automatically rotated for the image review.  
  If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the  
image might not rotate automatically for playback.  
  If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal  
computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate  
the image. Using the provided software is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Sensor Cleaning  
The camera has a Self Cleaning ensr Unit attached  
to the image sensor’s front layeow-pass filter) to  
shake off dust automatica
The Dust Delete Data can be appended to the  
image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased  
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
About smear adhering to the front of the sensor  
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant  
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.  
In case visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning,  
having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.  
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can  
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start  
shooting immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
fAutomatic Sensor Cleaning  
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self  
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on  
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this  
operation. However, you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as  
well as disable it.  
Cleaning the Sensor Now  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean nowf].  
2
  Turn the <> dial to select [Clean  
now], then press <0>.  
  ecOK] on the dialog screen,  
press <0>.  
X The screen will indicate that the  
sensor is being cleaned. Although  
there will be a shutter sound, a  
picture is not taken.  
  For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is  
placed on a table or other flat surface.  
  Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve that  
much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]  
option will remain disabled temporarily.  
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning  
  In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].  
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the  
power switch to <1> or <2>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
3Appending Dust Delete DataN  
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust  
that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust  
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image to later  
erase the dust spots. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo  
Professional (provided software) to erase the dust spots automatically.  
Preparation  
  Get a solid-white object (paper, etc.).  
  Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to infinity  
(). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and  
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.  
Obtain the Dust Delete Data  
Sel[Dut Delete Data].  
1
Uner the [y] tab, select [Dust  
elete Data], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
2
then press <0>. After the automatic  
sensor cleaning ends, a message will  
appear. Although there will be a  
shutter sound, a picture is not taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
3Appending Dust Delete DataN  
Photograph a solid-white object.  
3
  At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm / 0.7 ft.  
- 1.0 ft., fill the viewfinder with a  
patternless, solid-white object and  
take a picture.  
X The picture will be taken in the  
aperture-priority AE mode with an  
aperture of f/22.  
  Since the image will not be saved, the  
data can still be obtained even if there  
is no card in the camera.  
X
When the picture is taken, the camera  
will start obtaining the Dust Delete Data.  
When the Dust Delete Data is obtained,  
a message l appear.  
SeleK], ad the menu will reappear.  
 
dta was not obtained  
essfully, a message to that effect  
will appear. Follow the “Preparation”  
procedure on the preceding page, then  
select [OK]. Take the picture again.  
About the Dust Delete Data  
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG  
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you  
should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.  
To erase dust spots automatically with the provided software, see the  
Software Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly  
affects the image file size.  
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the  
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and  
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
3Manual Sensor CleaningN  
Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can  
be removed manually with a blower, etc.  
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the  
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon  
Service Center is recommended.  
Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean manually].  
2
  Turn the 5> dial to select [Clean  
mally]then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
3
then press <0>.  
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will  
lockup and the shutter will open.  
  CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.  
End the cleaning.  
4
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  As the power source, using the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately)  
is recommended.  
  If you use the battery, make sure it is fully recharged. If a battery grip with  
size-AA/LR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be  
possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN  
  While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. Doing any  
of the following will cut off the power and close the shutter. The  
shutter curtains and image sensor might get damaged.  
• Setting the power switch to <2>.  
• Opening the battery compartment cover.  
• Opening the card slot cover.  
  The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor  
with care.  
  Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the  
sensor.  
  Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If  
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or  
reflex mirror might get damaged.  
  Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can  
damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.  
  If smear that cannot be removed with a blowremains, having the  
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service ter is ecommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
Printing Images  
  Printing (p.190)  
You can connect the camirely to a printer and print  
out the images in the cardcamera is compatible with  
wPictBridge” which is the standard for direct printing.  
  Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.199)  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print  
images recorded in the card according to your printing  
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,  
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the  
print order to a photofinisher.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Preparing to Print  
The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera  
while you look at the LCD monitor.  
Connecting the Camera to a Printer  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
<2>.  
1
Set up the printer.  
2
  For details, see the printer’s  
instruction manual.  
Connect the camera to the  
3 printe
  e tinterface cable provided with  
amera.  
  Wen connecting the cable plug to  
the camera’s <q/C>  
terminal, the cable plug’s <D> icon  
must face the front side of the  
camera.  
  To connect to the printer, refer to the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Turn on the printer.  
4
Set the camera’s power switch to  
5 <1>.  
X Some printers may make a beeping  
sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Preparing to Print  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear, and the <w>  
icon will appear on the upper left to  
indicate that the camera is connected  
to a printer.  
wPictBridge  
6
  Movies cannot be pinted.  
  The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct  
or Bubble Jet Direct.  
  Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.  
  If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the  
printer. To find out what’s wrong, do the following:  
1. Press the <x> button to playback the image.  
2. Press <0>.  
3. On the print setting screen, select [Print].  
The error message will be displayed on the LCD monitor (p.198).  
  You can also print RAW images taken by this camera.  
  If you use the battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.  
With a fully-charged battery, printing up to about 4 hours is possible.  
  Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera and printer first. Hold  
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.  
  For direct printing, using the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to  
power the camera is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
wPrinting  
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the  
printer. Some settings might not be available. For details, see the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Printer-connected icon  
Select the image to be printed.  
  Check that the <w> icon is  
1
displayed on the upper left of the LCD  
monitor.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be printed.  
Press <  
0>.  
2
X The print setting screen will appear.  
Print setting screen  
Sets the inting effects (p.194).  
Sets the e or file number imprinting to on  
Se quantity to be printed.  
Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.197).  
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.  
Returns to the screen in step 1.  
Starts the printing.  
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.  
* Depending on the printer, some settings such as the date and file number  
imprinting and trimming might not be available.  
Select [Paper settings].  
3
  Select [Paper settings], then press  
<0>.  
X The paper settings screen will  
appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
wPrinting  
QSetting the Paper Size  
YSetting the Paper Type  
  Select the size of the paper loaded in  
the printer, then press <0>.  
X The paper type screen will appear.  
  Select the type of the paper loaded in  
the printer, then press <0>.  
  When using a Canon printer and  
Canon paper, read the printer’s  
instruction manual to check what  
paper types can be used.  
X The paglayout screen will appear.  
USetting the Page Layout  
elect the page layout, then press  
<0>.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
Bordered  
The print will have white borders along the edges.  
The print will have no white borders. If your printer cannot print  
borderless prints, the print will have borders.  
Borderless  
The shooting information* will be imprinted on the border on  
9x13cm and larger prints.  
Borderedc  
xx-up  
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.  
On A4 or Letter size paper, 20 or 35 thumbnails of the images  
ordered through DPOF (p.199) will be printed.  
[20-upc] will have the shooting information* imprinted.  
20-upc  
35-upp  
Default  
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.  
* From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter  
speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance,  
etc., will be imprinted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
wPrinting  
Set the printing effects.  
4
  Set as necessary. If you need not set  
any printing effects, go to step 5.  
  The screen display may differ  
depending on the printer.  
  Select the option on the upper right  
(circled in the screenshot), then press  
<0>.  
  Select the desired printing effect, then  
press <0>.  
  If the <e> icon is displayed next to  
<z>, you can also adjust the  
printing effect (p.196).  
Printing Effect  
Descrion  
The image will be printeordinto the printer’s standard  
colors. The imageif da is used to make automatic  
corrections.  
EOn  
EOff  
No automaic correcwill be performed.  
The image wll bprinted with higher saturation to produce  
more vivid blues and greens.  
EVivid  
The image noise is reduced before printing.  
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.  
ENR  
0 B/W  
Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.  
Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.  
0 Cool tone  
0 Warm tone  
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No  
automatic color adjustments will be applied.  
zNatural  
zNatural M  
EDefault  
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”  
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing  
adjustments than with “Natural.”  
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details,  
see the printer’s instruction manual.  
* When you change the printing effects, it is reflected in the image displayed  
on the upper left. Note that the printed image might look slightly different  
from the displayed image which is only an approximation. This also  
applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 196.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
wPrinting  
Set the date and file number  
5 imprinting.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Select <I>, then press <0>.  
  Set as desired, then press <0>.  
Set the number of copies.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Select <R>, then press <0>.  
  Set the number of copies, then press  
<0>.  
6
Start printing.  
  Select [Print], then press <0>.  
7
  With Easy printing, you can print another image with the same settings.  
Just select the image and press the <l> button. With Easy printing, the  
number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of  
copies.) Also, any trimming (p.197) will not be applied.  
  The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the  
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. See  
the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.  
  Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may  
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].  
  If image tilt correction (p.197) has been applied, it will take longer to print  
the image.  
  To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select  
[OK].  
  If you execute [7Clear all camera settings] (p.45) menu, all the  
settings will revert to the default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
wPrinting  
eAdjustment of Printing Effects  
In step 4 on page 194, select the printing  
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed  
next to <z>, press the <B>  
button. You can then adjust the printing  
effect. What can be adjusted or what is  
displayed will depend on the selection  
made in step 4.  
  Brightness  
The image brightness can be adjusted.  
  Adjust levels  
When you select [Manual], you can chang
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the  
image’s brightness and contrast.  
With the Adjust levels screen ayed, press  
the <B> button to change tsition of  
the <h>. Turn the <5> dial to freely adjust  
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level  
(128 - 255).  
  kBrightener  
Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject’s face look  
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.  
  Red-eye corr.  
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]  
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.  
 
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not show on the screen.  
  When you select [Detail set.], you can adjust the [Contrast],  
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color  
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is  
green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.  
  If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to  
the default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
wPrinting  
Trimming the Image  
Tilt correction  
You can crop the image and print only  
the trimmed portion as if the image was  
recomposed. Do the trimming right  
before printing. If you set the trimming  
and then set the print settings, you may  
have to set the trimming again.  
1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].  
2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.  
 
The image area within the trimming frme will be printed. The  
trimming frame’s aspect ratio can be canged with [Paper settings].  
Changing the trimming frme e  
When you press the <u<I> button, the size of the  
trimming frame wl changhe smaller the trimming frame, the  
larger the image magnication will be for printing.  
Moving the trimming frame  
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally.  
Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.  
Rotating the frame  
Each time you press the <  
B> button, the trimming frame will  
toggle between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables  
you to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image.  
Image tilt correction  
By turning the <5> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to  
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the  
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.  
3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
  You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the  
print setting screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
wPrinting  
  Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed  
as you specified.  
  The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will  
look on the print.  
  While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look  
at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed  
accurately.  
Handling Printer Errors  
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to  
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to  
resume printing. For details, see the printer’s instruction manual.  
Error Messages  
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the  
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop prnng. After fixing the  
problem, resume printing. For details oto fia printing problem, refer  
to the printer’s instruction manual.  
Paper Error  
Check whether the papr is propeloaded in the printer.  
Ink Error  
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.  
Hardware Error  
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.  
File Error  
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a  
different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The  
print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot  
be set individually for each image.)  
Setting the Printing Options  
Select [Print order].  
1
X Under the [3] tab, select [Print  
order], then press <0>.  
Select [Set up].  
  Select [Set up], then press <0>.  
2
Set the option as desired.  
3
  Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File  
No.].  
  Select the option, then press <0>.  
Select the setting, then press <0>.  
[Print type]  
[Date]  
[File No.]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.  
K
L
K
Index  
Multiple, thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.  
Print type  
Prints both the standard and index prints.  
L Both  
On  
Date  
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.  
Off  
On  
Off  
File number  
[On] imprints the file No. on the print.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  Press the <M> button.  
X The print order screen will reappear.  
  Next, select Sel.Image], [Byn], or  
[All image] order the images to be  
print
  Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file No. might not  
be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.  
  When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order  
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images  
from the card and try to print them.  
  Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able  
to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer,  
refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher  
about compatibility when ordering prints.  
  Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a  
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may  
not work or may be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the  
print order may not be possible.  
  RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.  
  With [Index] prints, both the [Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On]  
at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Print Ordering  
  Sel.Image  
Select and order images one by one.  
To display the three-image view, press  
the <I> button. To return to the  
single-image view, press the <u>  
button.  
After completing the print order, press  
the <M> button to save the print order  
to the card.  
[Standard] [Both]  
Press <  
the displayed mage will be placed. Then turn  
the < > diao set the number of copies (up  
0> and a print order for 1 copy of  
Quantity  
Total images  
selected  
5
to 99e prited for that image.  
ex
s <  
be included in the index print. The <  
icon will also appear on the upper left.  
0>, and the displayed image will  
Check mark  
X>  
Index icon  
  Byn  
Select [Byn] and select the folder. A print order for 1 copy of all the  
images in the folder will be placed. If you select Clear all and a  
folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.  
  All image  
A print order for 1 copy of all the images in the card will be placed. If  
you select Clear all, the print order for all the images in the card will  
be canceled.  
  Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order  
even if you set “Byn” or “All image.”  
  When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one  
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images might not be  
printed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
W Direct Printing with DPOF  
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily  
print images with DPOF.  
1 Preparing to print.  
  See page 190. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”  
procedure up to step 5.  
2 Under the [3] tab, select [Print order].  
3 Select [Print].  
  [Print] will be displayed only if the cama is connected to the  
printer and printing is possible.  
4 Set the [Paper settings]2)  
  Set the printing effets (p.19f necessary.  
5 Select [OK].  
  Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.  
  Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.  
 
If [Bordered] is set, the date might be imprinted on the border, depending on the printer.  
  Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a  
bright background or on the border.  
  Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.  
  If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining  
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop  
the printing and any of the following occurs:  
Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted  
print-ordered images.  
When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing.  
When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.  
  If a problem occurs during printing, see page 198.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
Customizing the  
Camera  
With Custom Functions, you cahane the camera  
functions to suit your preferenceAlso, the current  
camera settings can be sunder the Mode Dial’s  
<w>, <x>, and <y> pons.  
The features explained in this chapter can be set and  
used in the following shooting modes: d, s, f, a,  
F.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
3Setting Custom FunctionsN  
Select [8].  
  Turn the <6> dial to select the [8]  
1
tab.  
Select the group.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select C.Fn I -  
IV, then press <0>.  
2
Select the Custom Function  
Custom Function No.  
3 number.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
Custom Function No., then press  
<0>.  
Change the setting as desired.  
4
  Turn te <5> dial to select the  
settinumber), then press <0>.  
  easteps 2 to 4 if you want to set  
Custom Functions.  
  At the bottom of the screen, the  
current Custom Function settings are  
indicated below the respective  
function numbers.  
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <M> button.  
X The screen for step 2 will reappear.  
5
Clearing All Custom Functions  
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the  
Custom Function settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
3Custom FunctionsN  
k
shooting  
Movie  
A LV  
shooting  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Exposure level increments  
ISO speed setting increments  
ISO expansion  
k
k
k
k (<a>)  
p.206  
p.207  
Bracketing auto cancel  
Bracketing sequence  
Safety shift  
k
k
k
k
Flash sync. speed in Av mode  
C.Fn II: Image  
1
2
3
Long exposure noise reduction  
k
k
k (Stills)  
k (Stills)  
p.208  
p.209  
High ISO speed noise reduction  
Highlight tone priority  
k
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AI Servo tracking sensitivity  
AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority  
AI Servo AF tracking meth
Lens drive when AF mposs
AF Microadjustment  
p.09  
p.210  
k (f)  
k (f)  
k (f)  
k (f)  
p.211  
p.212  
Select AF area selection mode  
Manual AF point selection pattern  
VF display illumination  
Display all AF points  
p.213  
10 Focus display in AI SERVO/MF  
11 AF-assist beam firing  
12 Orientation linked AF point  
13 Mirror lockup  
k
(
f
)
p.214  
p.215  
k(f)  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
1
2
3
4
Custom Controls  
As set  
p.215  
p.216  
Dial direction during Tv/Av  
Add image verification data  
Add aspect ratio information  
k
k (<a>)  
k
k
k (Stills)  
k (Stills)  
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (Live View  
shooting) and/or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
C.Fn I -1 Exposure level increments  
0: 1/3-stop  
1: 1/2-stop  
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure  
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. Effective when  
you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop  
increments.  
The exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD  
panel as shown below.  
C.Fn I -2 ISO speed setting increments  
0: 1/3-stop  
1: 1-stop  
C.Fn I -3 ISO expnsion  
0: Off  
1: On  
For the ISO speed, “H” (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable.  
C.Fn I -4 Bracketing auto cancel  
0: On  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will be canceled if you set the power  
switch to <2> or clear the camera settings. AEB will also be canceled  
when the flash is ready to fire.  
1: Off  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will be retained even when the power  
switch is set to <2>. (When the flash is ready, AEB will be canceled.  
However, the AEB amount will be retained in memory.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn I -5 Bracketing sequence  
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can  
be changed.  
0: 0, -, +  
1: -, 0, +  
WB Bracketing  
AEB  
B/A Direction  
M/G Direction  
0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance  
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias  
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias  
- : Magenta bias  
+ : Green bias  
C.Fn I -6 Safety shift  
0: Disable  
1: Enable (Tv/Av)  
This works in the shutter-priority As) and aperture-priority AE (f)  
modes. When the subject’s brightnchanges erratically and the  
correct autoexposure cannbtined, the camera will change the  
exposure setting automaticaobtain a correct exposure.  
C.Fn I -7 Flash syn. speed in Av mode  
0: Auto  
Normally, the sync speed will be set automatically within 1/250 sec. to  
30 sec. High-speed sync can also take effect.  
1: 1/250-1/60 sec. auto  
When flash is used with aperture-priority AE (f), this prevents a slow  
flash-sync speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions. It  
is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. However,  
while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background  
will come out dark.  
2: 1/250 sec. (fixed)  
The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1/250 sec. This more effectively  
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However,  
the background will come out darker than with setting 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn II: Image  
C.Fn II -1 Long exposure noise reduction  
0: Off  
1: Auto  
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed  
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]  
setting is effective in most cases.  
2: On  
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The  
[On] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or  
reduced with the [Auto] setting.  
  With setting 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction  
process may take the same amount of time athe exposure. You cannot  
take another picture until the noise reductin rocess is completed.  
  At ISO 1600 and higher, noise mighmore ronounced with setting 2  
than with setting 0 or 1.  
  With setting 2, if a long exposseduring Live View shooting,  
BUSY” will be displayd and te View display will not appear until  
the noise reduction proess icompleted. (You cannot take another  
picture.)  
C.Fn II -2 High ISO speed noise reduction  
Reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is  
applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At  
low ISO speeds, the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change  
the setting to suit the noise level.  
0: Standard  
1: Low  
2: Strong  
3: Disable  
  With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly  
decrease.  
  If you playback a RAW or RAW+JPEG image with the camera or print  
the image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may  
look minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-  
reduced images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn II -3 Highlight tone priority  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded between  
the standard 18% gray and bright highlights. The gradation between the  
grays and highlights becomes smoother.  
  With setting 1, the [Disable] setting automatically takes effect for the  
Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.75) and it cannot be changed.  
  With setting 1, noise in the shadow areas may be slightly more than  
usual.  
With setting 1, the settable ISO speed range will be 200 - 6400.  
Also, <A> will be displayed on the LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
C.Fn III -1 AI Servo ng sensitivity  
During focusing in AI Sevo AF mode, the AF sensitivity for tracking  
subjects (or obstacles) movininto AF points can be set to one of five  
levels.  
If it is set toward [Slow], interruptions by any obstacles will be less  
disruptive. It makes it easier to keep tracking the target subject.  
If it is set toward [Fast], it will be easier to focus any subjects which  
suddenly enter the picture from the side. Convenient when you want to  
successively photograph multiple subjects located at random distances.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -2 AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority  
For the AI Servo AF and continuous shooting modes, you can change the  
Servo’s operation characteristics and shutter-release timing.  
0: AF priority/Tracking priority  
For the first shot, focusing the subject is given priority. For the 2nd and  
following shots during continuous shooting, focus-tracking of the subject  
is given priority.  
1: AF priority/Drive speed priority  
For the first shot, focusing the subject is given priority. During continuous  
shooting, the continuous shooting speed is given priority over the focus-  
tracking of the subject.  
2: Release/Drive speed priority  
For the first shot, shutter release is given priority over focusing the  
subject. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed is  
given priority more than with setting 1.  
3: Release/Tracking priority  
For the first shot, shutter release is gpriory over focusing the  
subject. For the 2nd and followinshoduring continuous shooting,  
focus-tracking of the subject is pririty.  
C.Fn III -3 AI Servo AF tracking method  
In the AI Servo AF mode while you are focus-tracking a subject, the camera  
can either continue focusing the target subject even if a closer subject  
(closer than at the main focus point) suddenly appears in the picture, or the  
camera can switch to focus the closer subject.  
*
Main focus point: With 19-point AF auto selection and AF point expansion, this is the  
first AF point which started the focusing. With Zone AF, this is the  
active AF point.  
0: Main focus point priority  
The active AF point will switch to the main focus point and start focusing  
the closer subject. Convenient when you always want to focus the  
closest subject.  
1: Continuous AF track priority  
Any closer subject appearing in the picture will be ignored as an  
obstruction. The main focus point does not take priority, so the tracking  
of the target subject can continue and switch to an adjacent AF point  
based on the preceding focusing result. Convenient when obstacles  
such as telephone poles go in front of the target subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -4 Lens drive when AF impossible  
If autofocus is executed, but focus cannot be achieved, the camera can  
either keep trying to focus or stop.  
0: Focus search on  
1: Focus search off  
Prevents the camera from becoming grossly out of focus as it attempts  
to focus again. Especially convenient with super telephoto lenses which  
can become extremely out of focus.  
C.Fn III -5 AF Microadjustment  
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Do this adjustment  
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent  
correct focusing from being achieved.  
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s  
point of focus. It an be adjusted in ±20 steps  
(-: Forwar+: Bckward).  
The adjusnt amunt of one step varies  
deng n the maximum aperture of the lens.  
Adhoot (73), and check the focus.  
Repeto adjust the AF’s point of focus.  
With setting 1 or 2 selected, pres the <B> button to view the register screen.  
To cancel all the registered adjustments, press the <L> button.  
0: Disable  
1: Adjust all by same amount  
The same adjustment amount is applied to  
all lenses.  
2: Adjust by lens  
An adjustment can be set individually for  
any particular lens. Adjustments for up to 20  
lenses can be registered in the camera.  
When a lens whose focus adjustment has  
been registered is attached to the camera, its point of focus will be  
shifted accordingly.  
If adjustments for 20 lenses have already been registered and you want  
to register an adjustment for another lens, select a lens whose  
adjustment can be overwritten or deleted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
  It is best to make the adjustment at the actual place where you will shoot.  
This will make the adjustment more precise.  
  With setting 2, if an Extender is used, the adjustment will be registered  
for the lens and Extender combination.  
  The registered AF microadjustments will be retained even if you use the  
Custom Function to clear all settings (p.204). However, the setting itself  
will be [0: Disable].  
  AF adjustment cannot be done during Live View shooting in Live and u  
Live modes.  
C.Fn III -6 Select AF area selection mode  
Make the mode selectable by selecting  
[Register], then pressing <0>.  
Turn the <5> dial o select the mode to be  
used, then press <0> to append a <X>  
checkmark
After makine selection, turn the <5> dial  
to sepply], then press <0>.  
If you t [Enable] and press <0>, only  
the modes with the <X> checkmark will be  
selectable.  
If you select [Disable] and press <0>, the default setting will make 19  
point AF, Zone AF (Manual select), and Single point AF selectable.  
C.Fn III -7 Manual AF point selection pattern  
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the outer  
edge or it can go on to the opposite AF point. This is effective for all the AF  
area selection modes except for 19 point AF auto selection and Zone AF.  
0: Stops at AF area edges  
Convenient if you often use an AF point along the edge.  
1: Continuous  
Instead of stopping at the edge, the AF point selection continues to the  
opposite edge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
3 Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -8 VF display illumination  
The AF points, grid, etc., in the viewfinder can be illuminated in red.  
0: Auto  
The viewfinder illumination turns on automatically under low light.  
1: Enable  
The viewfinder illumination turns on regardless of the ambient light  
level.  
2: Disable  
C.Fn III -9 Display all AF points  
0: Disable  
During the AF point selection, all the AF points are displayed. When  
shooting, only the active AF point(s) is(are) displayed.  
1: Enable  
As during AF point selection, all the AF ponts are displayed when  
shooting.  
C.Fn III -10 Focus dy iAI SERVO/MF  
0: Enable  
When AI Servo AF is set wh Zone AF and 19-point AF auto selection,  
the AF point(s) <S> which focuses will focus-track the subject.  
With manual focus, when focus is achieved, the focus confirmation  
indicator will be the same as with AF.  
1: Disable  
Even when focus is achieved with manual focus, there will be no focus  
confirmation indicator.  
With AI Servo AF used with AF point expansion, Zone AF, or 19-point AF  
auto selection, the AF point(s) <S> tracking the subject is not displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -11 AF-assist beam firing  
The AF-assist beam can be emitted by the camera’s built-in flash or by an  
external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite.  
0: Enable  
1: Disable  
The AF-assist beam is not emitted.  
2: Enable external flash only  
If an external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-  
assist beam when necessary.  
3: IR AF assist beam only  
Among EOS-dedicated Speedlites, only those which have an infrared AF-assist  
beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which uses a  
series of small flashes (like the built-in flash) from firing the AF-assist beam.  
If the external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite’s [AF-asist beam firing] Custom  
Function is set to [Disabled], the Speedlite wilnemit the AF-assist beam  
even if the camera’s C.Fn III -11-0/2/3 i
C.Fn III -12 Orientation d AF point  
The AF area selection mode nd manually-selected AF point (or Zone selected  
with Zone AF) can be set separatefor the vertical and horizontal orientations.  
0: Same for both vertical/horizontal  
The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or  
Zone selected with Zone AF) are used for both orientations.  
1: Select different AF points  
The AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or Zone  
selected with Zone AF) can be set separately for each camera  
orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3.  
Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom). Convenient when, for  
instance, you want to keep using the right AF point during all camera  
orientations.  
Setting procedure  
Manually select and set the AF selection mode and AF point (or Zone  
with Zone AF) for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with  
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom).  
When this is set, the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode  
and manually-selected AF point (or Zone selected with Zone AF) to suit  
each camera orientation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn III -13 Mirror lockup  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Prevents camera vibrations caused by the reflex mirror action that can  
disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close-up (macro)  
shooting. See page 109 for the mirror lockup procedure.  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
C.Fn IV -1 Custom Controls  
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials according  
to your preferences. You can also change the function of the Main Dial,  
Quick Control Dial, and <9>.  
For details, see page 217.  
C.Fn IV -2 Dial direction ng Tv/Av  
0: Normal  
1: Reverse direction  
The dial’s turning direction or setting the shutter speed and aperture  
can be reversed.  
In the manual exposure mode, the direction of the <6> and <5>  
dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the <6> dial will be  
reversed. The direction of the <5> dial will be the same in the manual  
exposure mode and for setting exposure compensation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn IV -3 Add image verification data  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Data for verifying whether the image is original or not is appended to the  
image automatically. When the shooting information of an image  
appended with the verification data is displayed (p.163), the <L> icon  
will appear.  
To verify whether the image is original, the Original Data Security Kit  
OSK-E3 (sold separately) is required.  
The images are not compatible with the image encryption/decryption  
features of Original Data Security Kit OSK-E3.  
C.Fn IV -4 Add aspect ratio information  
During Live View shooting, vertical lines correspnding to the aspect ratio  
will be displayed. You can thereby simulate framg for medium- and large-  
format film sizes such as 6x6 cm, 6x4.5 and 45 in.  
This aspect ratio information will bened automatically to the captured  
image. (The image will not actuallved to the memory card as a  
cropped image.)  
When the image is transferred to personal computer and the Digital Photo  
Professional (provided software) is used, the image will be displayed in the  
aspect ratio you specified.  
0: Off  
4: Aspect ratio 6:7  
5: Aspect ratio 10:12  
6: Aspect ratio 5:7  
1: Aspect ratio 6:6  
2: Aspect ratio 3:4  
3: Aspect ratio 4:5  
  Aspect ratio information will also be appended if you shoot through the  
viewfinder.  
  During image playback on the camera, vertical lines for the respective  
ratio will be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
3 Custom Function SettingsN  
C.Fn IV -1: Custom Controls  
Select [8C.Fn IV -1: Custom  
Controls].  
  A list of camera controls and their  
assigned functions will appear  
(p.218).  
1
  When you press <0>, the camera  
controls setting screen will appear.  
Select the camera button or dial.  
2
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
button/dial, then press <0>.  
X The name of the camera control and  
the assignable functions will be  
displaye
ign a function.  
urn the <5> dial to select the  
desired function, then press <0>.  
  If the [z] icon appears on the  
bottom left, you can press the <B>  
button and set other related options  
(p.219, 220). Select the desired  
option on the screen displayed, then  
press <0>.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  When you press <0> to exit the  
setting, the screen in step 2 will  
reappear.  
  Press the <M> button to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls  
Function  
Page  
*
Metering and  
AF start  
k
k*1 k*1  
k
k
AF stop  
k
k
k
219  
Switch to  
registered AF  
function  
k*2 k*2  
ONE SHOT z  
AI SERVO  
k
k
k
k
220  
220  
AF point direct  
selection  
k
k 3  
*
Metering start  
AE lock  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
FE lock  
Shutter speed  
setting in  
k
k
k
k
M mode  
Aperture  
setting in M  
mode  
Image quality  
k
220  
221  
One-touch  
RAW+JPEG  
k
k
Picture Style  
Image replay  
k
k
Depth-of-field  
preview  
k
k
IS start  
k
VF electronic  
level  
221  
Menu display  
k
k
Quick Control  
screen  
No function  
(disabled)  
k
k
k
k
* The AF stop button is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
  <  
> Metering and AF start  
When you press the button assigned with this function, metering and AF  
are executed.  
*1: If you assign the [Metering and AF start] function to the <p>  
and <A> buttons and add the function to switch to the registered AF  
point, you can instantly switch to the registered AF point. To enable  
this function, press the <B> button in step 3 on page 217. On the  
[AF start point] selection screen, select [Registered AF point].  
If C.Fn III -12 [Orientation linked AF point] (p.214) is set to [Select  
different AF points], you can register the AF point separately for the  
vertical (camera grip at top or bottom) and horizontal orientations.  
Registering and using an AF point  
1. Set the AF area selection mode to Single point AF, Spot AF, or AF point expansion (the  
AF point cannot be registered in the Zone AF and 19-point AF auto selection modes).  
2. Select an AF point manually (p.88).  
3. Hold down the <S> button and press the <U> button. A beep will  
sound and the AF point will be regiserd. The registered AF point will  
be displayed as a small point <.  
If C.Fn III -12-1 has been set, rter thAF point for the respective  
vertical and horizontal otios of the camera.  
4. When you press the <por <A> assigned with this function,  
the camera will swtch to thegistered AF point while in the current  
AF area selection mode Single point AF, Spot AF, AF point expansion,  
or Zone AF). With Zone AF, focusing will switch to the zone containing  
the registered AF point. If you want to switch to the center zone,  
register the center AF point or the one on its left or right. To cancel the  
registered AF point, press the <S> button and <m> button at the  
same time. Or cancel it with the [7Clear all camera settings] menu.  
  <  
> AF stop  
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned with this  
function. Convenient when you want to lock the focus during AI Servo AF.  
  <  
> Switch to registered AF function  
Set the AF area selection mode (p.87), AI Servo tracking sensitivity (p.209),  
AI Servo AF tracking method (p.210), and AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority  
(p.210). Only while you hold down the button assigned with this function, AF  
will be executed according to the respective setting. Convenient when you  
want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.  
*2: In step 3 on page 217, if you press the <  
B> button, the AF area selection  
mode screen will appear. Set as desired and select [OK]. The next screen will  
then appear. After you set the four functions, the original screen will reappear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
  <  
> ONE SHOT z AI SERVO  
In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold down the button to which this function  
has been assigned, the camera switches to AI Servo AF mode. And in the  
AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to One-Shot AF mode only while  
you hold down the button. Convenient when you need to keep switching  
between One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF for a subject which keeps moving  
and stopping.  
  < > AF point direct selection  
Without pressing the <S> button, you can select the AF point directly  
with <5> or <9>. With the <5> dial, you can only select a left or right  
AF point.  
*3: If you press the <B> button in step 3 on page 217, you can set that  
pressing <9> straight down selects either [Switch to center AF  
point] or [Switch to registered AF point].  
  < > Metering start  
When you press the shutter button halfwayyu can execute only  
exposure metering.  
  < > AE lock  
Pressing the button assigned with nction will apply AE lock. Convenient  
when you want to focus and meter aifferent parts of the picture.  
  < > FE lock  
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned with this function  
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).  
  < > Shutter speed setting in M mode  
In the <4> (Manual exposure) mode, you can set the shutter speed with  
the <6> or <5> dial.  
  < > Aperture setting in M mode  
In the <4> (Manual exposure) mode, you can set the aperture with the  
<6> or <5> dial.  
  < > Image quality  
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen (p.58)  
on the LCD monitor.  
  < > One-touch RAW+JPEG  
When you press the <B> button and shoot, the RAW or JPEG image  
set with [One-touch RAW+JPEG] (p.61) will also be recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
3Custom Function SettingsN  
  <  
> Picture Style  
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection screen (p.64) on the  
LCD monitor.  
  < > Image replay  
To playback images, press <0>.  
  < > Depth-of-field preview  
Pressing the depth-of-field preview button will stop down the aperture.  
  < > IS start  
With the lens’ IS switch set to <1>, the lens’ Image Stabilizer operates  
when you press the button.  
  <  
> VF electronic level  
Pressing the <B> button will display in the viewfinder a grid and an  
electronic level using the AF points.  
1°  
Over 4°  
0°  
1°  
Over 6°  
  <  
> Menu display  
Pressing <0> will display the menu on the LCD monitor.  
  < > Quick Control screen  
Pressing <0> will display the Quick Control screen on the LCD monitor.  
  < > No function (disabled)  
This is to assign no function to the button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
3Registering My MenuN  
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and  
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.  
Select [My Menu settings].  
1
  Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu  
settings], then press <0>.  
Select [Register].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select  
[Register], then press <0>.  
Register the desired item.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item,  
then press <0>.  
  On tonfimation dialog, select  
[OK] d press <0> to register the  
u iem.  
  can register up to six items in My  
Menu.  
  To return to the screen in step 2,  
press the <M> button.  
About My Menu settings  
  Sort  
You can change the order of the registered menu items in My Menu.  
Select [Sort] and select the menu item whose order you want to  
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn <5> to change  
the order, then press <0>.  
  Delete / Delete all items  
Deletes the registered menu items. [Delete] deletes one menu item  
at a time, and [Delete all items] deletes all menu items.  
  Display from My Menu  
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you  
display the menu screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
w Register Camera User SettingsN  
Under the Mode Dial’s <w>, <x>, and <y> positions, you can  
register most of the current camera settings including your preferred  
shooting mode, menus, Custom Function settings, etc.  
Select [Camera user setting].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Camera  
user setting], then press <0>.  
Select [Register].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select  
[Register], then press <0>.  
Register te camera user setting.  
3
  The <5> dial to select the Mode  
Diaposition where the camera  
ettings are to be registered, then  
press <0>.  
  On the confirmation dialog, select  
[OK] and press <0>.  
X The current camera settings (p.224)  
will be registered under the Mode  
Dial’s C* position.  
Clearing the Camera user settings  
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the respective Mode Dial  
position will revert to the default setting effective before you registered  
the camera settings. The procedure is the same as step 3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
wRegister Camera User SettingsN  
Settings Registered  
  Shooting functions  
Shooting mode + setting, ISO speed, AF mode, AF point, Metering  
mode, Drive mode, Exposure compensation amount, Flash  
exposure compensation amount  
  Menu functions  
[
1
]
Quality, Red-eye On/Off, Beep, Release shutter without card,  
Review time, Peripheral illumination correction, Flash control (Flash  
firing, Shutter sync., Flash exposure compensation, E-TTL II)  
Exposure compensation/AEB, Auto Lighting Optimizer, White  
balance, Custom WB, WB SHIFT/BKT, Color space, Picture Style  
[
2
]
[y] One-touch RAW+JPEG  
[z] Live View shooting, AF mode, Grid display, Exposure  
simulation, Silent shooting, Meterintimer  
[x] AF mode, Grid display, Movcordng size, Sound  
recording, Silent shooti, Mring timer (movie shooting)  
[4] Highlight alert, AF poilayHistogram, Slide show,  
Image jump w/6  
[5] Auto power off, Auto rotate, File numbering  
[6] LCD brightness, Sensor cleaning (Auto cleaning), VF grid  
display  
[7] INFO. button display options  
[8] Custom Functions  
  The My Menu settings will not be registered.  
  When the Mode Dial is set to the <w>, <x>, or <y> position, the [7  
Clear all camera settings] and [8Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]  
menus will not work.  
  Even when the Mode Dial is set to the <w>, <x>, or <y> position,  
you can still change the drive mode and menu settings. If you want to  
register those changes, follow the procedure on the preceding page.  
  By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is  
registered under the <w>, <x>, and <y> positions (p.228).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
3Setting Copyright InformationN  
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the  
image as Exif information.  
Select [Copyright information].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Copyright  
information], then press <0>.  
Select the desired option.  
2
  Select [Display copyright info.] to  
check the copyright information  
currently set.  
  Select [Delete copyright  
imation] to delete the copyright  
infmation currently set.  
urn the <5> dial, select either  
Enter author’s name] or [Enter  
copyright details], then press <0>.  
X The text entry screen will appear.  
Enter text.  
  Refer to “Text Entry Procedure” on  
3
the next page and enter the copyright  
information.  
  Enter up to 63 alphanumeric  
characters and symbols.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  After entering the text, press the  
<M> button to exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
3Setting Copyright InformationN  
Text Entry Procedure  
  Changing the entry area  
Press the <A> button to toggle  
between the top and bottom entry  
areas.  
  Moving the cursor  
Turn the <5> dial to move the  
cursor. You can also use <9> to  
move the cursor.  
  Entering text  
In the bottom area, turn the <5> dial to select a character, then  
press <0> to enter it. You can also tilt <9> up, down, left, or right  
to select a character and press it strght dwn to enter the  
character.  
  Deleting a character  
Press the <L> button o delete character.  
  Exiting  
After completing the text entry, press the <M> button to return to  
the screen in step 2.  
  Canceling the text entry  
To cancel the text entry, press the <B> button to return to the  
screen in step 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
Reference  
This chapter provides reference formation for camera  
features, system accessories, eThe back of this  
chapter also has an index ake it easier to look up  
needed information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
B Button Functions  
When you press the <B> button while  
the camera is ready to shoot, you can  
display [Displays camera settings],  
[Displays shooting functions] (p.225),  
and [Electronic level] (p.48).  
Under the [7] tab, the [INFO. button  
display options] option enables you to  
select what the <B> button is to  
display when pressed.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired item, then press <0> to  
append a <X> checkmark.  
  After making the selection, turn the  
<5> dial to select [OK], then press  
<0>
Camera Settings  
Shooting mode registered  
under the Mode Dial’s w, x,  
and ypositions  
(p.82)  
(p.73, 74)  
(p.72)  
Transfer of some images failed*  
(p.208)  
(p.208)  
(p.29, 59)  
Auto power off (p.44)  
* This icon is displayed only when the transfer of some images failed while using  
the Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E5A/B/C/D.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
B Button Functions  
Shooting Settings  
Picture Style  
Aperture  
Shutter speed  
Exposure level/  
AE lock  
ISO speed  
Highlight tone priority  
AEB range  
Flash exposure  
compensation*  
Shooting mode  
AF area selection mode  
Image-recording quality  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Custom Controls  
Shots remaining  
Quick Control icon  
Metering mode  
White balance correction  
Battery check  
AF mode  
White bce  
Drive mode  
Maximum burst  
* If flash exposure compensation with an external Speedlite, the flash  
exposure compensation con will cnge from <y> to <C>.  
  When you press the <Q> button, the Quick Control screen appears  
(p.38).  
  If you press the <m>, <o>, <n>, or <S> button,  
the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn  
the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective function. You can also  
select the AF point with <9>.  
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting settings display” screen is  
displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power  
again. To avoid this, press the <B> button to turn off the display on the  
LCD monitor, then turn off the power switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
3Checking the Battery Information  
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. A Battery  
Pack LP-E6 has a unique serial No., and you can register multiple  
battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you can check  
the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and operation history.  
Select [Battery info.].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Battery  
info.], then press <0>.  
X The battery info screen will appear.  
Battery position  
Model of the battery or household power  
source being used.  
The battery check (p.28) displays the  
remaining battery capacity in 1% increments.  
Shutter count oshots taken with the  
current bttery. he number is reset when  
the bats recarged.  
y’s echarge performance level is  
ded in one of three levels.  
(Green): Battery’s recharge  
performance is fine.  
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance  
is slightly degraded.  
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is  
recommended.  
Do not use any battery other than the Battery Pack LP-E6. Otherwise, the  
camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.  
  If you use two LP-E6 battery packs in the Battery Grip BG-E7, battery  
information for the two battery packs will appear.  
  When size-AA/LR6 batteries are used in the Battery Grip BG-E7, only  
the battery check display will be displayed.  
  If for some reason, communication with the battery is not successful, the  
battery check display will show <  
> on the LCD panel and in the  
viewfinder. [Cannot communicate with battery] will be displayed. Just  
select [OK] and you can continue shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Registering the Battery to the Camera  
You can register up to six Battery Pack LP-E6’s to the camera. To  
register multiple battery packs to the camera, do the procedure below  
for each battery pack.  
Press the <B> button.  
1
  With the Battery info. screen  
displayed, press the <B> button.  
X The battery history screen will  
appear.  
X If the battery has not been registered,  
it will be grayed out.  
Select [Register].  
2
  Turn the 5> dial to select  
[sterthen press <0>.  
Thconfirmation dialog will appear.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
3
then press <0>.  
X The battery pack will be registered,  
and the battery history screen will  
reappear.  
X The grayed out battery will now be  
displayed in white letters.  
  Press the <M> button. The battery  
info. screen will reappear.  
  Battery registration is not possible if size-AA/LR6 batteries are in the  
Battery Grip BG-E7 or if you use the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.  
  If six battery packs have already been registered, [Register] cannot be  
selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, refer to page 233.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Labeling the Serial No. on the Battery  
Affixing the serial No. onto all the registered Battery Pack LP-E6’s with  
a label makes it convenient.  
Write the serial No. on a label.  
Serial No.  
1
  Write the serial No. displayed on the  
battery history screen on a label  
about 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6  
in. in size.  
Take out the battery and affix the  
7c400300  
2 label.  
  Set oweswitch to <2>.  
  en he battery compartment cover  
emove the battery.  
  Affix the label as shown (side with no  
electrical contacts) in the illustration.  
  Repeat this procedure for all of your  
battery packs so you can easily see  
the serial No.  
Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in  
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label might make it difficult to insert the  
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
3Checking the Battery Information  
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack  
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even while  
not installed) and also when it was last used.  
Look for the serial No.  
Date last used  
Serial No.  
  Refer to the battery’s serial No. label  
and look for the battery’s serial No. on  
the battery history screen.  
X You can check the respective battery  
pack’s remaining capacity and the  
date when it was last used.  
Remaining capacity  
Deleting the Registered BattPack Information  
1 Select [Delete battery ].  
  Follow step 2 on page 2to select [Delete battery info.], then  
press <0>.  
2 Select the battery pack to be deleted.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the battery pack to be deleted, then  
press <0>.  
X <X> will appear.  
  To delete another battery pack, repeat this procedure.  
3 Press the <L> button.  
X The confirmation dialog will appear.  
4 Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK], then press <0>.  
X The battery pack information will be deleted, and the screen in  
step 1 will reappear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
Using a Household Power Outlet  
With the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately), you can connect the  
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the battery  
level.  
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.  
1
  Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the  
AC Adapter's socket.  
Connect the power cord.  
2
  Connect the power cord as shown in  
the illustration.  
  After using the camera, unplug the  
power plug om the power outlet.  
Place cord in the groove.  
3
  rt the DC Coupler’s cord carefully  
ut damaging the cord.  
Insert the DC Coupler.  
4
  Open the battery compartment cover  
and open the DC Coupler cord notch  
cover.  
  Insert the DC Coupler securely until it  
locks and put the cord through the  
DC Coupler cord hole  
notch.  
  Close the cover.  
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera’s power  
switch is set to <1>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
Replacing the Date/Time Battery  
The date/time (back-up) battery maintains the camera’s date and time.  
Its service life is about 5 years. If you turn on the power and the date/  
time is reset, replace the back-up battery with a new CR1616 lithium  
battery as described below.  
The date/time setting will also be reset, so be sure to set the  
correct date/time (p.42).  
Set the power switch to <2>.  
1
2
Remove the battery.  
Take ff thbattery holder.  
3
(+) ()  
Replace the battery.  
  Make sure the battery is in the proper  
+ – orientation.  
4
5
Insert the battery holder.  
  Then load the battery and close the  
cover.  
For the date/time battery, be sure to use a CR1616 lithium battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
Function Availability Table  
o: Set automatically k: User selectable  
: Not selectable  
Mode Dial  
JPEG  
1
k
k
k
o
C
k
k
k
o
d
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
s
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
f
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Quality  
RAW  
RAW+JPEG  
Auto  
ISO speed  
Manual  
Standard  
Portrait  
o
k
k
k
Landscape  
Neutral  
Picture  
Style  
Faithful  
Monochrome  
User Defined  
Auto WB  
Preset WB  
Custom WB  
k
o
o
White  
balance  
Color temperatur
setting  
k
k
k
k
k
WB correction  
WB bracketing  
sRGB  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
Color  
space  
Adobe RGB  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
o
k
o
k
Peripheral illumination  
correction  
k
k
k
k
k
Long exposure noise reduction  
High ISO speed noise reduction  
Highlight tone priority  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
Function Availability Table  
o: Set automatically k: User selectable  
: Not selectable  
Mode Dial  
One-Shot  
AI Servo  
AI Focus  
1
C
d
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
s
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
f
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
a
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
o
o
o
AF  
Auto  
AF point  
selection  
Manual  
AF-assist beam  
Evaluative  
o
o
o
o
Partial  
Metering  
mode  
Spot  
Center-weighted average  
Program shift  
Exposure compensation  
k*1  
k*2  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Exposure AEB  
AE lock  
k
Depth-of-field previ
Single shootng  
k
k
k
k
k
High-speed  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
continuous shootig  
Low-speed  
continuous shooting  
k
k
Drive  
10 sec. self-timer/  
Remote control  
k
o
k
2 sec. self-timer/  
Remote control  
Automatic firing  
Manual firing  
Flash off  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Built-in  
flash  
Red-eye reduction  
FE lock  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k*2  
k
k
Flash exposure compensation  
Live View shooting  
Movie shooting  
k
k
*1: Refers to “(2) Blurring/sharpening the background” function on page 54.  
*2: Refers to “(3) Adjusting the picture brightness” function on page 54.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
Menu Settings  
1 Shooting 1 (Red)  
Page  
58  
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 76 / 86  
Quality  
1 / 41 / 61  
Off / On  
Red-eye On/Off  
Beep  
112  
On / Off  
Release shutter  
without card  
Enable / Disable  
29  
56  
76  
Review time  
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold  
Enable / Disable  
Peripheral illumination  
correction  
Flash firing / Built-in flash function setting /  
External flash function seting / External flash  
C.Fn setting / Clear exteal flash C.Fn setting  
Flash control  
115  
2 Shooting 2 (Red)  
Exposure  
compensation/AEB  
1/3stop innts, ±5 stops (AEB ±3 stops)  
Disable / Low / Standard / Strong  
105  
75  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
Q / W / E / R / Y / U / I / O / P  
(2500 - 10000)  
White balance  
Custom WB  
70  
71  
Manual setting of white balance  
WB correction: White balance correction  
WB-BKT: White balance bracketing  
73  
74  
WB SHIFT/BKT  
Color space  
sRGB / Adobe RGB  
82  
PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape /  
Picture Style  
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / 64-69  
WUser Def. 1, 2, 3  
The shaded menu items are not displayed in fully-automatic modes (1/  
C).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
Menu Settings  
Page  
y Shooting 3 (Red)  
Dust Delete Data  
Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots  
185  
61  
One-touch RAW+JPEG Also capture RAW or JPEG when necessary  
z Shooting 4 (Red)  
Live View shooting  
AF mode  
Enable / Disable  
136  
138  
136  
136  
137  
Live mode / u Live mode / Quick mode  
Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m  
Enable / Disable  
Grid display  
Exposure simulation  
Silent shooting  
Metering timer  
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable  
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min. 137  
* For movie shooting, see page 242.  
3Playback 1 (Blue)  
Protect images  
Rotate  
Eraset images  
178  
168  
179  
199  
Rotate vertical images  
Erase images  
Print order  
Erase images  
Specifies images to be printed (DPOF)  
Displayed when external media is used via  
WFT-E5A/B/C/D (sold separately)  
External media backup  
4Playback 2 (Blue)  
Highlight alert  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Brightness / RGB  
163  
163  
164  
AF point display  
Histogram  
Select the images and set the Play time and  
repeat settings for automatic playback  
Slide show  
174  
166  
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /  
Folder / Movies / Stills  
Image jump w/6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
Menu Settings  
5Set-up 1 (Yellow)  
Page  
44  
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30  
min. / Off  
Auto power off  
Auto rotate  
Format  
OnzD / OnD / Off  
182  
43  
Initialize and erase data in the card  
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset  
Create and select a folder  
File numbering  
Select folder  
80  
78  
Displayed when WFT-E5A/B/C/D (sold  
separately) is attached  
WFT settings  
Recording  
Displayed when external media is used via  
function+media select WFT-E5A/B/C/D (sold separately)  
6Set-up 2 (Yellow)  
Auto: Adjustable ne of three brightness  
lev
LCD brightness  
181  
42  
Manual: Ale to one of seven brightness  
levels  
Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,  
min., sec.)  
Date/Time  
Language selectable  
NTSC / PAL  
42  
LanguageK  
Video system  
176  
Auto cleaning: Enable / Disable  
Clean now  
184  
Sensor cleaning  
VF grid display  
Clean manually  
187  
47  
Disable / Enable  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
Menu Settings  
Page  
7Set-up 3 (Yellow)  
Type, Remaining capacity, Shutter count,  
Battery info.  
Recharge performance, Battery registration,  
Battery history  
230  
INFO. button display  
options  
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /  
Displays shooting functions  
228  
223  
Register current camera settings to the Mode  
Dial’s w, x, or yposition  
Camera user setting  
Display copyright information / Enter author's  
Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete  
225  
copyright information  
Clear all camera  
Resets the camera to the default settings  
settings  
45  
Firmware Ver.  
For updating the firmare  
8Custom Functions (Oran
C.Fn I : Exposure  
206  
208  
C.Fn II : Image  
C.Fn III : Autofocus/  
Customize camera functions as desired  
209  
215  
204  
Drive  
C.Fn IV : Operation/  
Others  
Clear all Custom  
Functions (C.Fn)  
Clears all Custom Function settings  
9My Menu (Green)  
Register frequently-used menu items and  
Custom Functions  
My Menu settings  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
Menu Settings  
Movie Shooting Menu  
x Movie (Red)  
Page  
156  
156  
AF mode  
Live mode / u Live mode / Quick mode  
Grid display  
Off / Grid 1l / Grid 2m  
1920x1080 (6 / 5 / 4) /  
Movie recording size 1280x720 (8 / 7) /  
640x480 (8 / 7)  
156  
Sound recording  
Silent shooting  
On / Off  
157  
157  
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable  
4 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. / 10 min. / 30  
min.  
Metering timer  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
Troubleshooting Guide  
If a problem occurs, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this  
Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your  
dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.  
Power-Related Problems  
The battery pack does not recharge.  
  If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.230) is 94% or higher, the battery  
will not be recharged.  
 
Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6.  
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.  
 
If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery pack or if  
communication with the battery pack (noCanon battery packs) is not  
possible, the protective circuit wiminatthe charging and the orange  
lamp will blink quickly at a ar terval. If there is a problem with the  
battery charger or battery nplug the charger’s power plug from the  
power outlet. Detacand reattach the battery pack to the charger. Wait 2  
to 3 minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the  
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.  
The charger’s lamp does not blink.  
 
If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is  
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp  
off). During the charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for  
any reason, the charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the  
battery temperature goes down, the charging will resume automatically.  
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <  
1>.  
  The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.26).  
  Recharge the battery (p.24).  
  Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.26).  
  Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <  
2>.  
  If the power is cut off while an image is being recorded to the card, the  
access lamp will still continue to light/blink for a few seconds. When  
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.  
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.  
  Use a fully-charged battery (p.24).  
  The battery performance might have degraded. See the [7Battery  
info.] menu to check the battery’s performance level (p.230). If the  
battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.  
  If you keep displaying the Quick Control screen (p.38) or shooting Live  
View shooting or movie shooting (p.131, 149) for a prolonged period,  
the number of possible shots will decrease
The camera turns off by itself.  
  Auto power off is in effect. If not want auto power off to take  
effect, set [5Auto pwer offOff].  
Shooting-Related Problems  
No images can be shot or recorded.  
  The card is not properly inserted (p.29).  
  If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to  
make room (p.29, 179).  
  If you try to focus in One-Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation  
light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the  
shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus manually (p.35, 92).  
The viewfinder is dark.  
  Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.26).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The image is out of focus.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.31).  
  To prevent camera shake, hold the camera still and press the shutter  
button gently (p.34, 35).  
  If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.  
The card cannot be used.  
  If a card error message is displayed, see page 30 or 249.  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.  
  Set [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] to one of the  
following settings: [Standard/Low/Disable]. If it is set to [Strong], the  
maximum burst during continuous shoong will decrease (p.208).  
  If you shoot a subject which hadetal (field of grass, etc.), the file  
size will be larger and the ual aximum burst will be lower than the  
number mentioned on pa
ISO 100 cannot be set.  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], ISO 100  
cannot be set. If [Disable] is set, ISO 100 can be set (p.209).  
When I use the <  
f> mode with flash, the shutter speed becomes slow.  
  If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed  
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the  
subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a  
slow shutter speed to be set, set [8C.Fn I -7: Flash sync. speed in  
Av mode] to 1 or 2 (p.207).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The built-in flash does not fire.  
  If you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals, the  
flash might stop operating to protect the flash unit.  
The external flash does not fire.  
  Make sure the external flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to  
the camera.  
  If you use a non-Canon flash with Live View shooting, set the [z  
Silent shoot.] menu to [Disable] (p.137).  
The camera makes a noise when it is shaken.  
  The built-in flash’s pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal.  
The shutter makes two shooting sounuring Live View shooting.  
  If you use flash, the shutter wake wo sounds each time you shoot  
(p.133).  
Live View shooting is not possible.  
  For Live View shooting, use a memory card (a hard disk-type card is  
not recommended). A hard disk-type card requires a lower  
temperature range for operation than normal memory cards. If the  
temperature gets too high, the Live View shooting may stop  
temporarily to prevent damage to the card’s hard disk. When the  
camera’s internal temperature decreases, you can resume Live View  
shooting (p.146).  
The camera button/dial’s function has changed.  
  Check the setting with [8C.Fn IV -1: Custom Controls] (p.215).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The movie shooting terminates by itself.  
  If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop  
automatically. Use a card with a read/write speed of at least 8 MB per  
sec. To find out the card’s read/write speed, see the card  
manufacturer’s Web site.  
  If the movie file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie recording time  
reaches 29 min. 59 sec., movie shooting will stop automatically.  
When the movie is played, camera operation noise can be heard.  
  If you operate the camera’s dial or lens during movie shooting, the  
respective operation noise will also be recorded. Use an external  
microphone (commercially available) (p.158).  
Display & Operation Proble
In the viewfinder, the AF pdisplay speed is slow.  
  In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become  
slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)  
characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room  
temperature.  
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.  
  If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow  
or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
The menu screen shows few tabs and options.  
  In fully-automatic modes (1/C), some tabs and options are not  
displayed. Set the shooting mode to d/s/f/a/F (p.40).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Part of the image blinks in black.  
  The [4Highlight alert] menu option is set to [Enable] (p.163).  
A red box is displayed on the image.  
  The [4AF point disp.] menu option is set to [Enable] (p.163).  
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_MG_”).  
  Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character  
will be an underscore (p.82).  
The file numbering does not start from 0001.  
  If you use a card which already has imagerecorded, the file  
numbering might start from the last image the card (p.80).  
The shooting date and time plaed is incorrect.  
  The correct date and tme haeen set (p.42).  
No image appears on the TV screen.  
  Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is connected all the way  
in (p.176, 177).  
  Set the video OUT format (NTSC/PAL) to the same video format as  
the TV (p.240).  
  Use the AV cable that came with the camera (p.176).  
Printing-Related Problems  
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual.  
  What the screen displays may differ depending on the printer. This  
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.194).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Error Codes  
If there is a problem with the camera, an  
error message will appear. Follow the on-  
screen instructions.  
Error No.  
Countermeasures  
No.  
Error Message & Solution  
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the  
lens contacts.  
01  
ÎClean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a  
Canon lens. (p.13, 16)  
Card cannot be accessed. Rert/cange card or format card  
with camera.  
02  
04  
ÎRemove and nstall td again, replace the card, or format the  
card (p.29, 4.  
Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.  
ÎReplace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card  
(p.29, 179, 43).  
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on  
again.  
05  
06  
ÎOperate the power switch (p.27).  
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again.  
ÎOperate the power switch (p.27).  
Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and  
on again or re-install the battery.  
10, 20,  
30, 40,  
50, 60,  
70, 80  
ÎOperate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack  
again, or use a Canon lens (p.27, 26).  
* If the error still persists, write down the error No. and contact your nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
System Map  
Remote Remote  
Controller Controller  
ST-E2 270EX 430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite  
MR-14EX  
MT-24EX  
RC-5  
RC-1  
Bundled  
Accessories  
Dioptric Adjustment  
Lenses Eg  
Eyecup Eg  
Wide Strp  
EW-EOS7
Anti-Fog  
Eyepiece Eg  
Date / time  
CR1616 lithium battery  
Battery Pack  
LP-E6  
Battery Charger  
LC-E6 or LC-E6E  
Angle Finder C  
Battery Grip  
BG-E7  
Car Battery  
Cable  
CB-570  
Leather Case  
EH20-L  
AC Adapter DC Coupler  
AC-E6  
DR-E6  
AC Adapter Kit  
ACK-E6  
Battery Magazine  
BGM-E6  
Car Battery Charger  
CBC-E6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
System Map  
Timer Remote Remote  
Wireless  
Controller  
LC-5  
Controller  
TC-80N3  
Switch  
RS-80N3  
EF lenses  
EF-S lenses  
External microphone  
HDMI Cable HTC-00  
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
TV/Video  
USB external media  
File Transmitter  
WFT-E5A/B/C/D  
USB GPS unit  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction  
Solution Disk  
Manual  
Wireless LAN  
access point  
Interface Cable  
IFC-200U  
Wireless LAN adapter  
Ethernet port  
Interface Cable IFC-500U  
Personal  
computer  
USB port  
Windows Vista  
Windows XP  
Mac OS X  
Original Data  
Security Kit  
OSK-E3  
Card reader  
PC card slot  
PictBridge-compatible printer  
CF card  
PCMCIA adapter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
Specifications  
• Type  
Type:  
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in  
flash  
Recording media:  
Image sensor size:  
Compatible lenses:  
Type I or II CF card, UDMA-compatible  
22.3 x 14.9 mm  
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)  
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the lens focal length)  
Canon EF mount  
Lens mount:  
• Image Sensor  
Type:  
CMOS sensor  
Effective pixels:  
Aspect ratio:  
Approx. 18.00 megapixels  
3:2  
Dust delete feature:  
Auto, Manual, Dust Delete Data appending  
• Recording System  
Recording format:  
Image type:  
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0  
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon iginal)  
RAW+JPEG simulus recording possible  
Large : Apx. 10 megapixels (5184 x 3456)  
Medium : A8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304)  
Recorded pixels:  
Smal
RAW  
: Ap4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)  
: Approx. 17.90 megapixels (5184 x 3456)  
M-RAW : Approx. 10.10 megapixels (3888 x 2592)  
S-RAW : Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728)  
Create/select a folder: Possible  
• Image Processing  
Picture Style:  
Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,  
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3  
White balance:  
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,  
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color  
temperature setting (2500-10000K), white balance  
correction, and white balance bracketing possible  
* Color temperature information transmission enabled  
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots  
Noise reduction:  
Automatic image  
brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Highlight tone priority: Provided  
Lens peripheral  
illumination correction: Provided  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Specifications  
• Viewfinder  
Type:  
Eye-level pentaprism  
Coverage:  
Magnification:  
Eye point:  
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100%  
Approx. 1.0x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)  
Approx. 22 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1m-1  
Built-in dioptric adjustment: -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)  
)
Focusing screen:  
Composition aids:  
Mirror:  
Fixed  
Grid and electronic level  
Quick-return type  
Depth-of-field preview: Provided  
• Autofocus  
Type:  
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection  
AF points:  
19 (All cross-type)  
EV -0.5 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)  
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing (MF)  
Single point AF, Spot AAF point expansion, Zone AF,  
19-point AF auto electin  
Metering range:  
Focus modes:  
AF area selection modes  
:
AF-assist beam:  
AF fine adjustment:  
Small series of es fired by built-in flash  
Enabled AF icroadjustment  
• Exposure Control  
Metering modes:  
63zone TTL full-aperture metering  
• Evaluative metering (linkable to any AF point)  
• Partial metering (approx. 9.4% of viewfinder at center)  
• Spot metering (approx. 2.3% of viewfinder at center)  
• Center-weighted average metering  
Metering range:  
Exposure control:  
EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)  
Program AE (Full Auto, Creative Auto, Program), shutter-priority  
AE, aperture-priority AE, manual exposure, bulb exposure  
Auto, Creative Auto: Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200  
P, Tv, Av, M, B: ISO 100 - 6400 (in 1/3-stop increments),  
Auto, or ISO expansion to ISO 12800  
ISO speed:  
(Recommended  
exposure index)  
Exposure compensation: Manual and AEB (Settable in combination with manual  
exposure compensation)  
Settable amount: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments  
(AEB ±3 stops)  
AE lock:  
Auto: With One-Shot AF and evaluative metering, AE  
lock is applied when focus is achieved  
Manual: By AE lock button  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
Specifications  
• Shutter  
Type:  
Shutter speeds:  
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter  
1/8000 sec. to 1/60 sec. (Full Auto mode), X-sync at 1/  
250 sec.  
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb (Total shutter speed range.  
Available range varies by shooting mode.)  
• Flash  
Built-in flash:  
Retractable, auto pop-up flash  
Guide No.: 12/39 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)  
Flash coverage: 15mm lens angle of view  
Recycling time approx. 3 sec.  
Wireless master unit function provided  
EX-series Speedlite (Functions settable with the camera)  
E-TTL II autoflash  
External flash:  
Flash metering:  
Flash exposure  
compensation:  
FE lock:  
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop ncrements  
Provided  
Provided  
PC terminal:  
• Drive System  
Drive modes:  
SinglHigh-sontinuous, Low-speed continuous, 10-  
sec. slf-timr/remote control, 2-sec. self-timer/remote control  
Max. 8 shots per sec.  
Continuous shooting speed  
:
Max. burst:  
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 94 (126) shots  
RAW: Approx. 15 (15) shots  
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 6 (6) shots  
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO  
100 and Standard Picture Style) and a 4GB card.  
* Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA)  
4GB card based on Canon’s testing standards.  
• Live View Shooting  
Focusing:  
Live mode, Face detection Live mode (Contrast detection)  
Quick mode (Phase-difference detection)  
Manual focusing (5x/10x magnification possible)  
Evaluative metering with the image sensor  
EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Metering modes:  
Metering range:  
Silent shooting:  
Grid display:  
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)  
Two types  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Specifications  
• Movie Shooting  
Movie compression:  
MPEG-4 AVC  
Variable (average) bit rate  
Audio recording format: Linear PCM  
File type:  
MOV  
Recording size  
and frame rate:  
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p  
1280x720 (HD)  
640x480 (SD)  
: 60p/50p  
: 60p/50p  
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.0 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps, 60p:  
59.94 fps, 50p: 50.0 fps  
File size:  
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p): Approx. 330 MB/min.  
1280x720 (60p/50p)  
640x480 (60p/50p)  
: Approx. 330 MB/min.  
: Approx. 165 MB/min.  
Focusing:  
Metering modes:  
Same as focusing with Live View shooting  
Evaluative and center-weighted average metering with  
the image sensor  
* Automaticallby thAF mode  
EV 0 - 20 3°C°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)  
Program xposure compensation possible) for  
movies annual exposure  
Metering range:  
Exposure control:  
ISO speed:  
Auomatally set within ISO 100 - 6400, expandable to 12800  
With manual exposure, ISO 100 - 6400 set automatically/  
manually  
Sound recording:  
Grid display:  
Built-in monaural microphone  
External stereo microphone terminal provided  
Two types  
• LCD Monitor  
Type:  
TFT color liquid-crystal monitor  
Monitor size and dots: 3-in. with approx. 920,000 dots (VGA)  
Coverage: Approx. 100%  
Brightness adjustment: Auto, manual  
Electronic level:  
Interface language:  
Provided  
25  
• Image Playback  
Image display formats: Single, Single + Info (Image-recording quality, shooting  
information, histogram), 4-image index, 9-image index,  
image rotate possible  
Zoom magnification:  
Approx. 1.5x - 10x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
Specifications  
Image browsing methods  
:
Single image, jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting  
date, by folder, by movie, by stills  
Highlight alert:  
Slide show:  
Movie playback:  
Overexposed highlights blink  
All images, by folder, by date, movies, or stills  
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)  
Built-in speaker  
• Direct Printing  
Compatible printers:  
Printable images:  
Print ordering:  
PictBridge-compatible printers  
JPEG and RAW images  
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible  
• Custom Functions  
Custom Functions:  
27  
Camera user settings: Register under Mode Dial’s C1, C2, and C3 positions  
My Menu registration: Provided  
Copyright information: Entry and inclusion enabled  
• Interface  
Audio/video OUT/  
Digital terminal:  
Analog vidempible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio  
output  
For prsonal cuter communication and direct printing  
(Hi-Sped SB equivalent)  
HDMI mini OUT terminal  
External microphone  
IN terminal:  
:
Type C (Auto switching of resolution)  
3.5mm dia. stereo mini-jack  
Remote control terminal: Compatible with N3-type remote control  
Wireless remote control  
:
Compatible with Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5  
Extension system terminal  
:
For connection to Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E5A/B/C/D  
• Power Source  
Battery:  
Battery Pack LP-E6 (Quantity 1)  
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6  
* With Battery Grip BG-E7 attached, size-AA/LR6  
batteries can be used  
Battery information:  
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, and Recharge  
performance displayed  
Battery life:  
With viewfinder shooting:  
(Based on CIPA  
testing standards)  
Approx. 800 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 750 shots at 0°C/32°F  
With Live View shooting:  
Approx. 220 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 210 shots at 0°C/32°F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
256  
Specifications  
Maximum movie  
shooting time  
:
Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 23°C/73°F  
Approx. 1 hr. 10 min. at 0°C/32°F  
(With fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6)  
• Dimensions and Weight  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 148.2 x 110.7 x 73.5 mm / 5.8 x 4.4 x 2.9 in.  
Weight:  
Approx. 820 g / 28.9 oz. (body only)  
• Operation Environment  
Working temperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F  
Working humidity:  
85% or less  
• Battery Pack LP-E6  
Type:  
Rated voltage:  
Battery capacity:  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.2 V DC  
1800 mAh  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 38.4 x 21 x 56.8 mm / 15 x 0.8 x 2.2 in.  
Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.8 oz.  
• Battery Charger LC-E6  
Compatible battery:  
Recharging time:  
Rated input:  
Battery P-E6  
Aprox. 2 min.  
10 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
8.4 V DC/1.2A  
Rated output:  
Working temperature range: 5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F  
Working humidity: 85% or less  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 69 x 33 x 93 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.  
Weight: Approx. 130 g / 4.6 oz.  
• Battery Charger LC-E6E  
Compatible battery:  
Power cord length:  
Recharging time:  
Rated input:  
Battery Pack LP-E6  
Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.  
Approx. 2 hours 30 min.  
100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)  
8.4 V DC/1.2A  
Rated output:  
Working temperature range:5  
Working humidity:  
°
C - 40  
85% or less  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 69 x 33 x 93 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.  
Weight: Approx. 125 g / 4.4 oz. (excluding power cord)  
°C / 41°F - 104°F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
Specifications  
• EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 84  
Horizontal extent: 74  
Vertical extent: 53 30’ - 10  
°
30’ - 18  
10’ - 15  
25’  
°
25’  
°
°25’  
°
°
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
17 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
0.35 m / 1.15 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
0.21x (at 85mm)  
255 x 395 - 72 x 108 mm / 10.0 x 15.6 - 2.8 x 4.3 in. (at  
:
0.35 m / 1.15 ft.)  
Lens shift type  
72 mm  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens cap:  
E-72U  
Max. diameter x length: 81.6 x 87.5 mm / 3.2 x 3.4 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 575 g / 20.3 oz.  
EW-78E (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
• EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal ex4  
Horizontal e4  
Vertical extent: 5 30’ - 6  
°
2’ - 11  
30’ - 9  
20’  
°
°
30’  
30’  
°
°
°
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance  
16 elementin 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
0.45 m / 1.48 ft. (From image sensor plane) (at 135mm)  
:
* The minimum focusing distance varies depending on  
the lens focal length.  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
0.21x (at 135mm)  
327 x 503 mm / 12.9 x 19.8 in. (at 0.49 m / 1.61 ft.) -  
75 x 112 mm / 3.0 x 4.4 in. (at 0.45 m / 1.48 ft.)  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens shift type  
67 mm  
Lens cap:  
E-67U  
Max. diameter x length: 75.4 x 101 mm / 3.0 x 4.0 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz.  
EW-73B (sold separately)  
LP1116 (sold separately)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
Specifications  
• EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM  
Angle of view:  
Diagonal extent: 75° - 18°  
Horizontal extent: 65° - 15°  
Vertical extent: 46° - 10°  
16 elements in 12 groups  
f/22 - 36  
0.5 m / 1.64 ft. (From image sensor plane)  
0.19x (at 135mm)  
Lens construction:  
Minimum aperture:  
Closest focusing distance  
Max. magnification:  
Field of view:  
:
551 x 355 - 188 x 125 mm / 21.7 x 14.0 - 7.4 x 4.9 in. (at  
0.5 m / 1.64 ft.)  
Lens shift type  
72 mm  
Image Stabilizer:  
Filter size:  
Lens cap:  
E-72U  
Max. diameter x length: 78.4 x 96.8 mm / 3.1 x 3.8 in.  
Weight:  
Hood:  
Case:  
Approx. 500 g / 17.6 oz.  
EW-78B II (sold separaly)  
LP1116 (sold separatel
  All specifications above are bason non’s testing standards.  
  The camera’s specifications arioare subject to change without notice.  
  If a problem occurs wita non-lens attached to the camera, consult the  
respective lens maker.  
Trademarks  
  Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
  CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
  Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
  Macintosh and Mac OS is a trademark or registered trademark of Apple Inc. in  
the United States and other countries.  
  HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or  
registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
  All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this  
manual are the property of their respective owners.  
*
This digital camera supports Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 and Exif  
2.21 (also called “Exif Print”). Exif Print is a standard that enhances  
compatibility between digital cameras and printers. By connecting the camera  
to an Exif Print-compliant printer, the shooting information is incorporated to  
optimize the print output.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
About MPEG-4 Licensing  
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be  
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video  
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a  
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.  
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”  
* Notice displayed in English as required.  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with  
genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this  
product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-  
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery  
pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the  
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, altough you may request  
such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
  The charger cannot charge aery other than Battery Pack LP-E6.  
  Battery Pack LP-E6 is edicateanon products only. Using it with an  
incompatible battery chrger or product may result in malfunction or  
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
Safety Warnings  
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,  
and material damage.  
Preventing Serious Injury or Death  
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the  
safeguards below:  
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this  
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do  
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose  
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery  
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.  
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not  
mix new and old or different types of batteries.  
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range  
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.  
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,  
accessories, connecting cables, etc.  
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a ild swallows the battery, consult a  
physician immediately. (Battery chemicaharm the stomach and intestines.)  
• When disposing of a battery pack ck-battery, insulate the electrical contacts  
with tape to prevent contact with etac objects or batteries. This is to prevent  
fire or an explosion.  
• If excessive heat, smoke, fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,  
immediately unplug the battry carger from the power outlet to stop the recharging  
and prevent a fire.  
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or  
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.  
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can  
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or  
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a  
physician immediately.  
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord  
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.  
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the  
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.  
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When  
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.  
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and  
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and  
fire.  
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an  
explosion or fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do  
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause  
electrical shock.  
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.  
Doing so may damage your vision.  
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally  
choke the child.  
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.  
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s  
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.  
To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:  
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.  
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.  
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.  
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or ut a heavy object on the cord.  
Also do not twist or tie the cords.  
- Do not connect too many power plugs to the me pwer outlet.  
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has bemage.  
• Occasionally unplug the power plug aa y cloth to clean off the dust around  
the power outlet. If the surrounding is umi, or oily, the dust on the power outlet  
may become moist and short-rcuit the to cause a fire.  
Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage  
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The  
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause  
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.  
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap  
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.  
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap  
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.  
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,  
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so  
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up  
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.  
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.  
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact  
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
Digital Camera Model DS126251 Systems  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for  
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These  
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged  
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antena.  
— Increase the separation between the uipment and receiver.  
— Connect the equipment into alet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is cocted.  
Consult the dealer or arieced radio/TV technician for help.  
The cable with the ferrite core prwith the digital camera must be used  
with this equipment in orer to comy with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part  
15 of the FCC rules.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise  
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you  
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.  
Canon U.S.A. Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
Tel No. (516)328-5600  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC  
Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:  
8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or  
electrical shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety  
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E6 & LC-E6E.  
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on  
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery  
pack.  
3. CAUTION To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E6.  
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other  
damage.  
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.  
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in  
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.  
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than  
by cord when disconnecting charger.  
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or  
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.  
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them  
immediately.  
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,  
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qalified serviceman.  
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to a quified serviceman when  
service or repair is required. Incorrect emblmay result in a risk of  
electric shock or fire.  
11. To reduce risk of electric shock, g carger from outlet before  
attempting any maintenance or g.  
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTON  
Unless otherwise stated in this maual, there are no user serviceable parts  
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.  
USA and Canada only:  
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is  
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on  
how to recycle this battery.  
For CA, USA only  
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may  
apply.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
265  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
Index  
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay ...................94  
1280x720......................................156  
1920x1080....................................156  
19-point AF auto selection........87, 90  
1st-curtain sync.............................117  
2nd-curtain sync ...........................117  
4- or 9-image index display...........165  
640x480........................................156  
Autofocus J Focusing  
Automatic selection (AF).......... 87, 90  
Automatic selection  
of AF point................................ 87, 90  
Av (Aperture-priority AE).............. 100  
B
B (Bulb) ........................................ 107  
B/W .......................................... 65, 67  
Battery J Power  
A
Battery check ................................. 28  
Battery Grip............................ 28, 250  
Beeper.............................. 50, 85, 238  
Black-and-white image............. 65, 67  
Bracketing .............................. 74, 105  
Bub........................................... 107  
Bexposres ............................ 107  
A/V OUT ...............................169, 176  
AC Adapter Kit..............................234  
Access lamp ...................................30  
Add aspect ratio information.........216  
Adobe RGB.....................................82  
AE lock..................................106, 220  
AEB...............................105, 206, 207  
AF J Focusing  
C
AF area selection mode....87, 89, 212  
AF Microadjustment....................211  
AF point ..........................................87  
AF point expansion...........87, 89, 212  
AF stop button ..............................219  
AF-ON (AF start) button..................35  
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF)................86  
w, x, y ............................. 20, 223  
C (Creative Auto)......................... 53  
Cable........................ 3, 169, 176, 177  
Camera  
Camera shake ......................... 109  
Clear camera settings................ 45  
Holding the camera.................... 34  
Settings display........................ 228  
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)................86  
Characteristics..................209, 210  
AI Servo AF ..............................52, 86  
Camera shake.......................... 33, 35  
Camera user settings............. 20, 223  
Card ................................... 13, 29, 43  
Card reminder............................ 29  
Format ....................................... 43  
Problem ..................................... 30  
Aperture-priority AE ......................100  
Audio/video OUT ..................169, 176  
Auto Lighting Optimizer ............49, 75  
Auto playback ...............................174  
Auto power off...........................27, 44  
Auto reset .......................................81  
Auto rotate of vertical images .......182  
Center-weighted average  
metering ....................................... 103  
CF card J Card  
Charger .................................... 22, 24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Index  
Cleaning........................................183  
Clear camera settings.....................45  
Clock...............................................42  
Color space.....................................82  
Color temperature...........................72  
Color tone .......................................66  
Continuous......................................80  
Continuous shooting ...............93, 229  
Contrast ..........................................66  
Copyright information....................225  
Cord ..........................3, 169, 176, 177  
Creative Auto ..................................53  
M icon..............................................4  
Cross-type focusing ........................91  
Exposure level increments ........... 206  
Exposure simulation..................... 136  
Extension........................................ 81  
External Speedlite J Flash  
Eyecup ......................................... 108  
Eyepiece cover....................... 23, 108  
F
Faithful............................................ 65  
FE lock ................................. 114, 220  
FEB .............................................. 116  
File name........................................ 80  
File number .................................... 80  
File size .......................... 59, 157, 163  
Filter ffect (Monochrome) ............. 67  
ine (mage-recording quality) ....... 59  
rmware Ver. ............................... 241  
Custom Functions.........................204  
Clear all ....................................204  
D
Flash  
Date/Time ....................................
Date/time battery replacement....235  
DC Coupler ..................................234  
Custom Functions.................... 118  
Effective range......................... 112  
External Speedlite............ 115, 129  
FE lock............................. 114, 220  
Flash control ............................ 115  
Flash exposure compensation ... 113  
Flash off ..................................... 54  
Flash-sync speed............. 111, 207  
Manual flash............................. 116  
MULTI flash.............................. 116  
Red-eye reduction.................... 112  
Shutter sync. (1st/2nd curtain) ... 117  
Wireless ................................... 119  
Depth-of-field preview...........101, 135  
Digital terminal ..............................190  
Dioptric adjustment .........................34  
Direct printing J Printing  
Direct selection (AF point).............220  
DPOF............................................199  
Drive mode..............................93, 229  
Dust Delete Data...........................185  
E
Flash exposure compensation ..... 113  
Flash mode................................... 116  
Flash-sync contacts........................ 16  
Focus confirmation light ................. 50  
Focus lock ...................................... 52  
Focus mode switch........... 31, 92, 145  
Electronic level........48, 134, 152, 221  
Erase (image) ...............................179  
Error codes ...................................249  
Evaluative metering ......................103  
Exposure compensation ...............104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
Index  
Focusing  
AF area.........................87, 89, 212  
I
ICC profile ...................................... 82  
AF characteristics...209, 210, 211, 219  
AF mode.....................84, 220, 229  
AF point display........................213  
AF point registration .........214, 219  
AF point selection.......88, 220, 229  
AF-assist beam ........................214  
Beeper................................50, 238  
Difficult-to-focus subjects....92, 142  
Live View shooting ...................131  
Manual focusing .........92, 145, 213  
Movie shooting .........................149  
Out of focus..........51, 92, 142, 145  
Recompose ................................52  
Switch to registered AF  
Illumination  
LCD panel.................................. 37  
Viewfinder................................ 213  
Image  
AF point display ....................... 163  
Auto playback .......................... 174  
Auto rotate ............................... 182  
Erase ....................................... 179  
Highlight alert........................... 163  
Histogram ................................ 164  
Index........................................ 165  
Jump display  
(Image browsing)..................... 166  
Magnied view......................... 167  
anurotate........................... 168  
ybac.................................. 161  
rotect ..................................... 178  
Shooting information................ 163  
View on TV ...................... 169, 176  
function.....................................219  
Folder Create/Select.......................78  
Format (CF card initialization).........4
Frame rate ....................................15
Full Auto........................................50  
Full HD.........................................19  
Full High-Definition .......156, 169, 177  
Function availability table..............236  
Image area..................................... 32  
Image dust prevention.................. 183  
Image review time.......................... 56  
Image Stabilizer (lens).................... 33  
Image-recording quality.................. 58  
Image verification data................. 216  
Index display ................................ 165  
G
Grid display.....................47, 136, 156  
H
HDMI.....................................169, 177  
High ISO speed noise reduction...208  
High-Definition ..............156, 169, 177  
Highlight alert................................163  
Highlight detail loss.......................163  
Highlight tone priority....................209  
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........164  
Hot shoe .......................................130  
Household power..........................234  
ISO speed .............. 62, 153, 206, 229  
Automatic setting ....................... 63  
ISO expansion ......................... 206  
Setting increments................... 206  
J
JPEG.............................................. 58  
Jump display ................................ 166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
Index  
Manual selection (AF) .............. 87, 89  
Maximum burst......................... 59, 60  
Medium (Image-recording quality) .... 59  
Memory card J Card  
L
Landscape ......................................64  
Language selection.........................42  
Large (Image-recording quality)......59  
Menu  
LCD monitor....................................13  
Brightness adjustment..............181  
Image playback ........................161  
Menu settings .....................40, 238  
Shooting settings display..........229  
Menu settings........................... 238  
My Menu .................................. 222  
Setting operation........................ 40  
3 icon......................................... 4  
Metering mode ..................... 103, 229  
MF (Manual focusing)..................... 92  
Mirror lockup......................... 109, 215  
Mode Dial J Shooting mode  
LCD panel.......................................18  
Lens ..........................................21, 31  
Lock release ...............................32  
Peripheral illumination  
correction....................................76  
Monochrome image.................. 65, 67  
Live View shooting........................131  
Exposure simulation .................136  
Face detection Live mode (AF)...139  
Grid display..............................
Information display .................
Live mode (AF).......................
Manual focusing ....................145  
Metering timer...........................137  
Possible shots ..........................133  
Quick Control............................135  
Quick mode (AF) ......................143  
Silent shooting..........................137  
Mvi........................................... 149  
AF mode .................................. 156  
Editing...................................... 173  
Editing first/last scene.............. 173  
Enjoying ................................... 169  
File size.................................... 157  
Frame rate ............................... 156  
Grid display.............................. 156  
Information display................... 152  
Manual exposure ..................... 153  
Metering timer.......................... 157  
Movie-recording size................ 156  
Playback .................................. 171  
Quick Control ........................... 155  
Recording time......................... 157  
Silent shooting ......................... 157  
Sound recording....................... 157  
Still image shooting.................. 154  
View on TV....................... 169, 176  
Long exposure noise reduction.....208  
M
M (Manual exposure)....................102  
Magnified view ......................145, 167  
Main Dial.........................................36  
Main Dial.....................................36  
Quick Control Dial.......................37  
Multi-controller.......................... 36, 88  
My Menu....................................... 222  
Malfunction....................................243  
Manual exposure ..................102, 153  
Manual focusing..............92, 145, 213  
Manual reset ...................................81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
Index  
Power  
Auto power off...................... 27, 44  
N
Neutral ............................................65  
Battery check............................. 28  
Battery info............................... 230  
Household power..................... 234  
Possible shots.............. 28, 59, 133  
Recharge ................................... 24  
Noise reduction  
High ISO speed........................208  
Long exposures........................208  
Nomenclature .................................16  
Non-Canon flash units ..................130  
Normal (Image-recording quality) ...58  
NTSC....................................156, 240  
Number...........................................80  
Pressing completely....................... 35  
Pressing halfway............................ 35  
Printing......................................... 189  
Page layout.............................. 193  
Paper settings.......................... 192  
Print Order (DPOF).................. 199  
Printing effects ......................... 194  
Tilt correction ........................... 197  
Trimmng.................................. 197  
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............85  
One-Shot AF...................................85  
Operation button  
customization........................215, 217  
Pgram E.................................... 96  
ogram shift ............................. 97  
P
Proect (image erase-protection) .... 178  
P (Program AE) ..............................9
PAL .......................................56, 240  
Partial metering...........................103  
PC terminal.............................16, 130  
Peripheral illumination correction....76  
Personal white balance...................72  
PictBridge .....................................189  
Picture Style..............................64, 69  
Pixels ..............................................58  
Playback J Image  
Q
Q (Quick Control) ......... 38, 135, 155  
Quick Control Dial .......................... 37  
Quick Control screen...................... 38  
Quick mode (AF).......................... 143  
R
RAW......................................... 58, 60  
RAW+JPEG ............................. 59, 61  
Recharge........................................ 24  
Recharge performance .......... 25, 230  
Red-eye reduction........................ 112  
Release shutter without card.......... 29  
Remote control shooting ...... 108, 110  
Remote Switch............................. 108  
Rotate (image) ............. 168, 182, 197  
Portrait ............................................64  
Possible shots...................28, 59, 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274  
Index  
S
T
Safety shift ....................................207  
Safety warnings ............................261  
Saturation........................................66  
Self-timer.........................................94  
Sensor cleaning ............................183  
Sepia (Monochrome) ......................67  
Sharpness.......................................66  
Shooting information display.........163  
Tone priority.................................. 209  
Toning effect (Monochrome)........... 67  
Tracking method........................... 210  
Trimming (printing) ....................... 197  
Tripod socket.................................. 17  
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................... 98  
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA)........... 29, 59, 154  
USB (Digital) terminal................... 190  
User defined................................. 223  
Shooting mode................................20  
Aperture-priority AE..................100  
Bulb ..........................................107  
Creative Auto..............................53  
Full Auto .....................................50  
Manual exposure......................102  
Program AE................................96  
Shutter-priority AE ......................98  
V
Video system................ 156, 176, 240  
View n TV........................... 169, 176  
ewfinder....................................... 19  
Dioptric adjustment .................... 34  
Illumination............................... 213  
Shooting settings display ............
Shutter button ..............................
Shutter sync...............................117  
Shutter-priority AE...........................98  
Silent shooting ......................137, 157  
Single image display.....................162  
Single shooting ...............................93  
Single-point AF .........................87, 89  
Slide show.....................................174  
Small (Image-recording quality)......58  
Spot metering................................103  
sRGB ..............................................82  
Stopped-down aperture ................101  
Strap ...............................................23  
Subject tracking sensitivity............209  
System map..................................250  
Volume (Movie playback) ............. 172  
W
WB J White balance  
White balance......................... 70, 229  
Bracketing.................................. 74  
Correction .................................. 73  
Custom....................................... 71  
Personal..................................... 72  
Wireless remote control................ 110  
Z
Zone AF............................ 87, 90, 212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
U.S.A.  
CANON U.S.A. INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.  
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.  
1-800-OK-CANON  
CANADA  
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS  
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada  
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH  
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada  
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE  
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada  
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada  
1-800-OK-CANON  
EUROPE,  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
AFRICA &  
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.  
MIDDLE EAST  
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON UK LTD.  
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom  
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany  
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.  
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, I), aly  
CANON Schweiz A.G.  
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, and  
Canon GmbH  
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vust
CANON España,S.A.  
Av. De Europa,6 Acobendas adrid, Spain  
CANON PortugaS.A.  
Rua Alfredo da Sil14 Algide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal  
CENTRAL &  
CANON LATIN AMERIA, INC.  
SOUTH AMERICA 703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.  
ASIA  
CANON (China) Co., LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China  
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.  
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.  
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea  
OCEANIA  
JAPAN  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia  
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.  
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand  
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.  
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan  
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of September 2009. For information  
on the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after  
this date, contact any Canon Service Center.  
CT1-1032-000  
© CANON INC. 2009  
PRINTED IN JAPAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Bloomfield Coffeemaker 8542 D1 User Manual
Bolens Trimmer 244 603 000 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Washer WFR 3230 User Manual
Braun Electric Toothbrush S12013 User Manual
Bravetti Pasta Maker KPS110H User Manual
Briggs Stratton Pressure Washer 020212 0 User Manual
Califone Microphone PADM 510 User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Nail Gun IN729000AV User Manual
Canon Scanner DR 3080CII User Manual
Carrier Personal Lift ZONECC3Z User Manual